The URL can be used to link to this page

Browse Search

Home My WebLink About20000709 RESOLUTION RE: APPROVE COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM AGREEMENT AND AUTHORIZE CHAIR TO SIGN - MOTOROLA, INC. WHEREAS, the Board of County Commissioners of Weld County, Colorado, pursuant to Colorado statute and the Weld County Home Rule Charter, is vested with the authority of administering the affairs of Weld County, Colorado, and WHEREAS, the Board has been presented with a Communications System Agreement between the County of Weld, State of Colorado, by and through the Board of County Commissioners of Weld County, on behalf of the Weld County Regional Communications Department, and Motorola, Inc., with terms and conditions being as stated in said agreement, and WHEREAS, after review, the Board deems it advisable to approve said agreement, a copy of which is attached hereto and incorporated herein by reference. NOW, THEREFORE, BE IT RESOLVED by the Board of County Commissioners of Weld County, Colorado, that the Communications System Agreement between the County of Weld, State of Colorado, by and through the Board of County Commissioners of Weld County, on behalf of the Weld County Regional Communications Department, and Motorola, Inc., be, and hereby is, approved. BE IT FURTHER RESOLVED by the Board that the Chair be, and hereby is, authorized to sign said agreement. The above and foregoing Resolution was, on motion duly made and seconded, adopted by the following vote on the 29th day of March, A.D., 2000. BOARD OF COUNTY COMMISSIONERS WE D COUNTY, COLORA O ATTEST: Li/ ,' ,• V r ' �• �' a Barbara . Kirkmeyer, Chair Weld County Clerk to th o nicci q afy y ` � � / ile, Pro-Tem Deputy Clerk to the LA Y . L / t4t--1 / , CCI P, Ge r e'E. Baxter APPR ED AS -f--a��d � � Dale K. Hall bounty Atto y J\ �� Gle�aadl�� 2000-0709 CM0012 de: C.i9 Immo repo t . March 14, 2000 Captain Michael Savage Weld County Communications Department PO Box 758 Greeley CO 80632 Re: Weld County Project 25 Smartzone System Proposal Captain Savage: Motorola Inc., by and through its Commercial, Government, and Industrial Solutions Sector ("CG1SS"), is pleased to present to you the enclosed proposal for the Weld County Project 25 Smartzone System. This Proposal consists of this cover letter, the agreed upon Communications System Agreement, the Phase-1 System Description, the Acceptance Test Plan, the Statement of Work, the Equipment List, and the Training Proposals for both Police and Fire. You may accept this Proposal by signing where indicated on the Communications System Agreement. Motorola appreciates your consideration of this Proposal and hopes you will find it acceptable. We look forward to receiving your response. If you have any questions, please do not hesitate to contact William Fleming, Motorola Account Manager at 970- 416-0123. Sincerely, MOTOROLA, INC. By:_ L l Larry Olson Vice-President, Sales Communications System Agreement COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM AGREEMENT Motorola, Inc., a Delaware corporation ("Motorola"), by and through the United States & Canada Group of its Commercial, Government, and Industrial Solutions Sector ("CGISS"), and Weld County, Colorado ("Customer") enter into this Communications System Agreement (the "Agreement"), effective as of the last date signed below (the "Effective Date"), pursuant to which Customer will purchase and Motorola will provide Customer with a Communications System. Section 1 EXHIBITS The Exhibits below are hereby incorporated into and made a part of this Agreement. In interpreting this Agreement and resolving any ambiguities, the main body of this Agreement will take precedence over the Exhibits and any inconsistency between the Exhibits will be resolved in the order in which the Exhibits appear below. Exhibit A Motorola software license agreement ("Software License Agreement") Exhibit B Motorola system description ("System Description"), acceptance test plan ("Acceptance Test Plan" or "ATP"), equipment list ("Equipment List"), and statement of work ("Statement of Work"), dated March 14, 2000. Exhibit C Enhanced System Support Plan ("ESS Plan") Exhibit D Motorola service agreement ("Service Agreement") and Motorola Software Subscription Agreement ("Subscription Agreement") Section 2 DEFINITIONS Capitalized terms used in this Agreement and not otherwise defined within the Agreement have the following meanings: "Communications System" or "System" is the communications system described in Exhibit B, including the Equipment and Software described in the System Description, Statement of Work, Acceptance Test Plan and Equipment List. "Equipment" is the equipment specified in the Equipment List included in Exhibit B. "Motorola Software" is software whose copyright is owned by Motorola. "Non-Motorola Software" is software whose copyright is owned by a party other than Motorola. "Software" includes Motorola and any Non-Motorola Software that may be furnished with the Communications System. Section 3 SCOPE OF AGREEMENT A. SCOPE OF WORK. Motorola will assemble and integrate the Equipment and Software, and deliver, install and test the Communications System at designated sites, as specified in Exhibit B and in accordance with this Agreement. Customer will perform its responsibilities as specified in Exhibit B and in accordance with this Agreement. B. CHANGE ORDERS. Either party may request changes within the general scope of this Agreement. If a requested change causes an increase or decrease in the cost of or time required for the performance of this Agreement, Motorola and Customer will agree to an equitable adjustment in the Agreement price or performance schedule, or both. Motorola is Contract No. 99-13392/shd Page 1 03-14-00 Communications System Agreement not obligated to comply with requested changes unless and until both parties execute a written change order. C. ADDITIONAL PRODUCTS. For three (3) years after the Effective Date of this Agreement, Customer may submit purchase orders for additional portable and mobile subscriber products manufactured by Motorola's CGISS which are currently available at the time of order. If Customer and Motorola have agreed to a convention for processing electronic data interchange ("EDI") transactions, purchase orders may be transmitted electronically Each purchase order must specifically refer to this Agreement and will be an offer by Customer subject to Motorola's acceptance. Except for pricing and delivery terms, which must be stated on the purchase order, Customer and Motorola agree that the applicable terms of the main body of this Agreement will be the only terms and conditions that govern the purchase and sale of products identified on such purchase orders. Customer and Motorola agree that payment for all additional products so purchased will be due within twenty-five (25) days after the date of Motorola's invoice for the products. D. MAINTENANCE SERVICE. During the first year after System Acceptance, maintenance services and software support are provided pursuant to the terms of this Agreement. the ESS Plan (Exhibit C) and the applicable provisions of the Service Agreement (Exhibit D). The applicable provisions of the Service Agreement are those entitled "Service Defined" (but excluding, for purposes of the ESS Plan, the first sentence of subparagraph B of "Service Defined"), "Excluded Services", "Right to Subcontract/Assignment", "Time and Place of Service", and "Warranty". Such services are included in the Purchase Price. After the first year following System Acceptance, Customer may purchase maintenance services and software support for the Communications System pursuant to a separately executed Service Agreement and Software Subscription Agreement. E. MOTOROLA SOFTWARE. Any Motorola Software furnished will be licensed to Customer solely according to the terms and restrictions of the Software License Agreement attached as Exhibit A. Customer hereby accepts all of the terms and restrictions of the Software License Agreement. F. NON-MOTOROLA SOFTWARE. Any Non-Motorola Software furnished by Motorola will be subject to the terms and restrictions of its copyright owner unless such copyright owner has granted to Motorola the right to sublicense such Non-Motorola Software, in which case the Software License Agreement (including any addendum to satisfy such copyright owner's requirements) shall apply. Section 4 PERFORMANCE SCHEDULE A. Motorola and Customer agree to perform their responsibilities in accordance with the following performance schedule as supplemented by the schedule included in the Statement of Work. Subject to execution of this Agreement by March 28, 2000: 1. Motorola will ship the Equipment to designated Customer site(s) on or before June 16, 2000. 2. Motorola will install the Equipment on or before October 20, 2000. 3. Motorola and Customer will complete acceptance testing within four (4) weeks after installation is completed. B. By executing this Agreement, Customer authorizes Motorola to proceed with the manufacture, assembly, integration, delivery, installation, and testing of the Communications System. No further notice to proceed, purchase order, authorization, resolution, or any other action will be required. Contract No. 99-13392/shd Page 2 03-14-00 COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM AGREEMENT Section 5 PAYMENT SCHEDULE A. The total contract price for Phase 1 is $ 950,758.12. Except for the first payment, which is due when Customer executes this Agreement, Customer agrees to make payments to Motorola within twenty-five (25) days after the date of invoices that will be submitted by Motorola according to the following payment schedule: 1. 50%of the total contract price is due when Customer executes this Agreement; 2. 40% of the total contract price will be invoiced immediately after the Equipment is shipped from Motorola's facilities; and 3. 10%of the total contract price will be invoiced immediately after System Acceptance B. Overdue invoices will bear interest at a rate of 10% simple interest per annum, unless such rate exceeds the maximum allowed by law, in which case it shall be reduced to the maximum allowable rate. C. If the total contract price does not include freight charges, all freight charges will be pre-paid by Motorola and added to the invoices. Section 6 INSTALLATION AND SITE CONDITIONS A. In addition to its responsibilities described in the Statement of Work, Customer agrees to provide a designated project director, procure any necessary construction permits, building permits, zoning variances and the like, provide access to the sites identified in the Exhibits as requested by Motorola, and have such sites available for installation of the Equipment by Motorola in accordance with the performance schedule and Statement of Work. B. If either Motorola or Customer determines during the course of performance of this Agreement that the sites identified in the Exhibits are no longer available or desired, or if subsurface, structural, adverse environmental or latent conditions at any site differ from those indicated on the specifications in the Exhibits, Motorola and Customer will promptly investigate the conditions and jointly select replacement sites or adjust the installation plans and specifications as necessary. C. If Customer and Motorola determine that any change in sites, site availability, installation plans, or specifications will require an adjustment in the contract price or in the time required for the performance of this Agreement, the parties will agree to an equitable adjustment in the price, performance schedule, or both; and this Agreement will be modified in accordance with Section 3.B of this Agreement. D. This Agreement is predicated upon normal soil conditions as defined by the version of E.I A. standard RS-222 in effect on the Effective Date of this Agreement. Section 7 TRAINING If training is included in this Agreement, Customer agrees to notify Motorola immediately if a date change for a scheduled training program is required. A charge will apply to a training program rescheduled by Customer less than thirty (30)days prior to its scheduled start date. Section 8 SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE A. Motorola will test the Communications System in accordance with the Acceptance Test Plan. System acceptance will occur upon the successful completion of such testing ("System Acceptance") at which time both parties shall promptly execute a certificate of system Contract No. 99-13392/shd Page 3 03-14-00 COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM AGREEMENT acceptance. If the Acceptance Test Plan includes separate tests for individual subsystems, both parties shall promptly execute certificates of subsystem acceptance upon the successful completion of testing of such subsystems. Minor omissions or variances in performance which do not materially affect the operation of the Communications System as a whole will not postpone System Acceptance. Customer and Motorola will jointly prepare a list of such omissions and variances which Motorola will correct according to an agreed upon schedule. B. Motorola agrees to notify Customer when the Communications System is ready for acceptance testing. Motorola and Customer agree to commence acceptance testing within ten (10) business days after receiving such notification. If testing is delayed for reasons within the control of Customer or its contractors, agents and consultants for more than ten (10) business days after notification, final payment will be due within thirty (30) days after such notification and the Warranty Period will commence immediately. C. Motorola may, but is not obligated to, issue written authorization for Customer's use of the Communications System or its subsystem(s) for limited training or testing purposes, prior to the completion of testing by Motorola. Any use of the Communications System without prior written authorization by Motorola shall constitute System Acceptance. Section 9 WARRANTY A. WARRANTY PERIOD. Upon System Acceptance, the System Functionality representation described below is fulfilled. The Equipment and Motorola Software is warranted for a period of one (1) year after System Acceptance ("Warranty Period") in accordance with the applicable limited warranties shown below. In no event will the warranty period last longer than twenty-four (24) months after the Equipment and Software is shipped from Motorola. Customer must notify Motorola in writing if Equipment or Motorola Software does not conform to these warranties no later than one month after the expiration of the Warranty Period. B. SYSTEM FUNCTIONALITY. Motorola represents that the Communications System will satisfy the functional requirements in Exhibit B. Upon System Acceptance, this System Functionality representation is fulfilled. After System Acceptance, the Equipment Warranty set forth below, the Software Warranty set forth in the Software License Agreement, and the Enhanced System Support Plan described in Exhibit C will apply. Motorola will not be responsible for performance deficiencies of the System caused by ancillary equipment not furnished by Motorola attached to or used in connection with the System provided hereunder. Additionally, Motorola will not be responsible for System performance where the functionality is reduced for reasons beyond Motorola's control including but not limited to i) an earthquake, adverse atmospheric conditions or other natural causes; ii) the construction of a building that adversely affects the microwave path reliability or RF coverage; iii) the addition of additional frequencies at System sites that cause RF interference or intermodulation; iv) Customer changes to load usage and/or configuration outside the parameters specified in Exhibit B; v) any other act of parties who are beyond Motorola's control, including Customer or its employees, contractors, consultants or agents. C. EQUIPMENT WARRANTY. Motorola warrants the Equipment against material defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service during the Warranty Period. Unless otherwise specified in writing, the Warranty Period for non-Motorola manufactured Equipment will be as stated in this Section. At no additional charge and at its option, Motorola will either repair the defective Equipment, replace it with the same or equivalent Equipment, or refund the purchase price of the defective Equipment, and such action on the part of Motorola will be the full extent of Contract No. 99-13392/shd Page 4 03-14-00 Communications System Agreement Motorola's liability hereunder. Repaired or replaced Equipment is warranted for the balance of the original applicable warranty period. All replaced parts of the Equipment shall become the property of Motorola. THIS WARRANTY DOES NOT APPLY TO a) Defects or damage resulting from use of the Equipment in other than its normal and customary manner. b) Defects or damage occurring from misuse, accident, water, or neglect. c) Defects or damage occurring from testing, operation, maintenance, installation, alteration, modification, or adjustment not provided by Motorola pursuant to this Communications System Agreement. d) Breakage or damage to antennas unless caused directly by defects in material or workmanship. e) Equipment that has been subjected to unauthorized Equipment modifications, disassembly or repairs (including the addition to the Equipment of non-Motorola supplied equipment if not authorized by Motorola) which adversely affect performance of the Equipment or interfere with Motorola's normal warranty inspection and testing of the Equipment to verify any warranty claim. f) Equipment which has had the serial number removed or made illegible. g) Batteries (because they carry their own separate limited warranty). h) Freight costs to the repair depot. i) Equipment which, due to illegal or unauthorized alteration of the software/firmware in the Equipment, does not function in accordance with Motorola's published specifications or with the FCC type acceptance labeling in effect for the Equipment at the time the Equipment was initially distributed from Motorola. j) Scratches or other cosmetic damage to Equipment surfaces that does not affect the operation of the Equipment. k) Software. I) Normal and customary wear and tear. D. YEAR 2000 EXPRESS WARRANTY. During the Warranty Period, Motorola warrants that each hardware, software, and firmware product delivered under this Agreement ("Product") shall be able to accurately process date data (including, but not limited to, calculating, comparing, and sequencing) from, into, and between the year 1999 and the year 2000, including leap year calculations, when used in accordance with the Product documentation provided by Motorola, provided that all products (e.g., hardware, software, firmware) used in combination with such Product properly exchange date data with it. All Product manufactured by parties other than Motorola are warranted hereunder based upon Year 2000 statements, representations, and warranties made by these parties to Motorola. Motorola has not verified the content of those Year 2000 statements but is merely republishing those statements, representations, and warranties for purposes of this warranty. For any Product that utilizes third party computer operating system software, such as Microsoft Windows NT 4.0 or Windows 95, that third party software is warranted only with respect to the specific functions of it that are necessary in the performance of the Contract No. 99-13392/shd Page 5 03-14-00 Communications System Agreement Communication System provided under this Agreement. The remedies available for breach of this warranty shall be as defined in, and subject to, the terms and limitations of the Equipment Warranty provided above. Except as provided herein, nothing in this warranty statement shall be construed to limit any rights or remedies provided elsewhere in this Agreement with respect to matters other than Year 2000 performance. E. MOTOROLA SOFTWARE WARRANTY. Motorola Software is warranted in accordance with the terms of the Software License Agreement attached as Exhibit A. F. These express limited warranties as set forth in this Section are extended by Motorola to the original end user purchasing or leasing the System for commercial, industrial, or governmental use only, and is not assignable or transferable, it being understood that this provision will not apply to the case where the Customer or its operating entity has a name change or the customer sets up a new operating entity to operate the system and an assignment or transfer occurs to facilitate such action. These are the complete warranties for the Equipment and Software provided pursuant to this Agreement. G. THESE WARRANTIES ARE GIVEN IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES. MOTOROLA DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT WILL MOTOROLA BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES IN EXCESS OF THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE EQUIPMENT. IN NO EVENT WILL MOTOROLA BE LIABLE FOR ANY LOSS OF USE, LOSS OF TIME, INCONVENIENCE, COMMERCIAL LOSS, LOST PROFITS OR SAVINGS OR OTHER INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE EQUIPMENT, TO THE FULL EXTENT SUCH MAY BE DISCLAIMED BY LAW. Section 10 FCC LICENSES AND AUTHORIZATIONS Customer agrees to obtain all Federal Communications Commission ("FCC") licenses and authorizations required for installation and use of the Communications System prior to the scheduled installation of the Equipment. Although Motorola may assist in the preparation of license applications, in no event will Motorola or any of its employees be an agent or representative of Customer in FCC matters. Customer is solely responsible for obtaining all FCC licenses and for complying with FCC rules. Section 11 DELAYS A. Successful project implementation will require cooperation and fairness between the parties. Because it is impractical to provide for every contingency which may arise during the course of performance of this Agreement, the parties agree to notify the other if they become aware that any condition will significantly delay performance. The parties will agree to reasonable extensions of the project schedule by executing a written change order. B. Under no circumstances will either party be responsible for delays or lack of performance resulting from events beyond the reasonable control of that party ("Excusable Delays"). Such events include, but are not limited to, acts of God, weather conditions, compliance with laws and regulations (excluding Customer's failure to properly and timely apply for all required FCC licenses), governmental action, bid protests, fire, strikes, lock-outs, and other labor disruptions, material shortages, riots, acts of war, and an Excusable Delay of a Motorola subcontractor. C. Customer will make available to Motorola the sites when scheduled and Customer will not otherwise unreasonably delay or prevent Motorola's performance of its responsibilities. In the event of a Customer delay during the time of shipment, Motorola may ship the equipment as Contract No. 99-13392/shd Page 6 03-14-00 Communications System Agreement scheduled to a location as designated by the Customer or if no such location is designated, a Motorola designated storage facility for which Customer agrees to pay all fees. If Customer delays Motorola's performance, the performance schedule will be extended, the Customer will make the milestone payments as if no delay occurred, and the parties will execute a Change Order to compensate Motorola for reasonable charges incurred because of such delays. Such charges include, but are not limited to, costs incurred by Motorola and/or its subcontractors for additional freight, warehousing and handling; suspending and re- mobilizing the work; additional engineering and standby time calculated at then current man- day rates; and preparing and implementing a "work around" plan. Likewise, should Motorola cause a delay which causes the Customer to incur expense, Motorola agrees to reimburse Customer for its reasonable direct expenses so incurred. Section 12 DEFAULT A. If Motorola fails to complete delivery, installation or acceptance testing in accordance with this Agreement, Customer may consider Motorola to be in default, unless such failure has been caused by an Excusable Delay. Customer agrees to give Motorola written notice of such default. Motorola will have thirty (30) days from the receipt of such notice to provide a plan of action that is acceptable to Customer to cure the default. B. If Motorola fails to cure the default, Customer may terminate any unfulfilled portion of this Agreement. If Customer completes the Communications System through a third party, Customer may recover the reasonable costs of completing the Communications System to a capability not exceeding that specified in the Agreement, less the unpaid portion of the Contract Price. Customer agrees to use its best efforts to mitigate such costs. Motorola's liability under this Section is subject to the limitations of the Section entitled Limitation of Liability of this Agreement. C. THE REMEDIES PROVIDED IN THIS SECTION OF THE AGREEMENT WILL BE THE FULL EXTENT OF MOTOROLA'S LIABILITY IN THE EVENT OF DEFAULT. D. If the Customer fails to perform any of its obligations hereunder, then Motorola may consider Customer to be in default, unless such failure has been caused by an Excusable Delay. Motorola agrees to give Customer written notice of such default. Customer will have thirty (30) days from the receipt of such notice to provide a plan of action that is acceptable to Motorola to cure the default. Section 13 INDEMNIFICATION A. GENERAL INDEMNITY. Motorola agrees to and hereby indemnifies and saves Customer harmless from all liabilities which may accrue against Customer on account of direct physical damage to tangible property or personal injury to the extent the damage or injury is caused by Motorola's negligence or recklessness, or that of its employees, subcontractors, or agents while on the Customer's premises during the delivery, installation, or testing of the Communications System pursuant to this Agreement B. PATENT AND COPYRIGHT INFRINGEMENT. Motorola will defend, at its own expense, any suit brought against the Customer to the extent that it is based on a claim that the Equipment or Motorola Software infringe a United States patent or copyright, and Motorola will pay those costs and damages finally awarded against the Customer in any such suit which are attributable to any such claim, but such defense and payments are conditioned on the following: i) Motorola must be notified promptly in writing by Customer of any notice of such claim; ii) Motorola will have sole control of the defense of such suit and all negotiations for its settlement or compromise; and iii) should the Equipment or Motorola Software become, or in Motorola's opinion be likely to become, the subject of a claim of infringement of a United States patent or copyright, Customer will permit Motorola, at its option and expense, either to Contract No. 99-13392/shd Page 7 03-14-00 Communications System Agreement procure for Customer the right to continue using the Equipment or Motorola Software or to replace or modify the same so that it becomes non-infringing or to grant Customer a credit for the Equipment or Motorola Software as depreciated and accept its return. The depreciation amount will be based upon generally accepted accounting standards for such Equipment and Software. Motorola will have no liability with respect to any claim of patent or copyright infringement which is based upon the combination of the Equipment or Motorola Software furnished hereunder with software, apparatus or devices not furnished by Motorola, nor will Motorola have any liability for the use of ancillary equipment or software not furnished by Motorola which is attached to or used in connection with the Equipment. The foregoing states the entire liability of Motorola with respect to infringement of patents and copyrights by the Equipment and Motorola Software or any parts thereof. C. Motorola's indemnification of Customer under this Section will be the full extent of Motorola's indemnification of Customer from liabilities that are in any way related to Motorola's performance under this Agreement. Section 14 DISPUTES Motorola and Customer will attempt to settle any claim or controversy arising from this Agreement through consultation and negotiation in good faith and a spirit of mutual cooperation. Section 15 LIMITATION OF LIABILITY Notwithstanding any other provision to this Agreement, except for personal injury or death, Motorola's total liability, whether for breach of contract, warranty, negligence, strict liability in tort, indemnification, or otherwise, will be limited to the direct damages recoverable under law, but not to exceed the price of the Equipment or services with respect to which losses or damages are claimed. IN NO EVENT WILL MOTOROLA BE LIABLE FOR ANY LOSS OF USE, LOSS OF TIME, INCONVENIENCE, COMMERCIAL LOSS, LOST PROFITS OR SAVINGS, OR OTHER SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN ANY WAY RELATED TO OR ARISING FROM THIS AGREEMENT, THE SALE OR USE OF THE EQUIPMENT, OR THE PERFORMANCE OF SERVICES BY MOTOROLA PURSUANT TO THIS AGREEMENT. This Limitation of Liability will survive the expiration or termination of this Agreement. Section 16 GENERAL A. TITLE AND RISK OF LOSS. Title to the Equipment will pass to Customer upon shipment of the Equipment, except that title to Software will not pass to Customer at any time. Risk of loss will pass to Customer upon delivery of the Equipment to the facilities designated by Customer. B. TAXES. The purchase price does not include any amount for federal, state, or local excise, sales, lease, service, rental, use, property, occupation, or other taxes, all of which (other than federal, state, and local taxes based on Motorola's income or net worth) will be paid by Customer except as exempt by law. If Motorola is required to pay or bear the burden of any such taxes, Motorola will send an invoice to Customer and Customer will pay to Motorola the amount of such taxes (including any interest and penalties) within thirty days after the date of the invoice. Customer will be solely responsible for reporting the Equipment for personal property tax purposes. C. CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION. Customer will not disclose any material or information identified as Motorola proprietary and confidential to third parties without Motorola's prior written permission, unless Motorola makes such material or information public or disclosure is required by law. If Customer is required by law to disclose such material or information, Customer will notify Motorola prior to such disclosure. Contract No. 99-13392/shd Page 8 03-14-00 Communications System Agreement D. DISCLAIMER OF LICENSE. Except as explicitly provided in the Motorola Software License Agreement included in Exhibit A, nothing in this Agreement will be deemed to grant, either directly or by implication, estoppel, or otherwise, any license or right under any patents, patent applications, copyrights, trade marks, trade secrets or other intellectual property of Motorola. E. ASSIGNABILITY. This Agreement may not be assigned by either party without the prior consent of the other party except that Motorola may assign this Agreement to any of its affiliates or its right to receive payment without the prior consent of Customer. F WAIVER. Failure or delay by either party to exercise any right or power under this Agreement will not operate as a waiver of such right or power. G. SEVERABILITY. If any portion of this Agreement is held to be invalid or unenforceable, that provision will be considered severable and the remainder of this Agreement will remain in full force and effect as if the invalid provision were not part of this Agreement. H. HEADINGS AND SECTION REFERENCES. The headings given to the sections of this Agreement are inserted only for convenience and are not to be construed as part of this Agreement or as a limitation of the scope of the particular Section to which the heading refers. I. ENTIRE AGREEMENT. This Agreement (including the Exhibits) constitutes the entire agreement of the parties regarding the subject matter of this Agreement and supersedes all previous agreements and understandings, whether written or oral, relating to such subject matter. This Agreement may be altered, amended, or modified only by a written instrument signed by the duly authorized representatives of both parties. J. GOVERNING LAW. This Agreement will be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of the State to which the Equipment is shipped. K. NOTICES. Notices authorized or required under this Agreement must be in writing and sent to the below addresses: Customer Motorola, Inc. Attn: Attn: Contract and Compliance Manager 9980 Carroll Canyon Road San Diego, CA 92131 In witness whereof, the parties have caused duly authorized representatives to execute this Agreement on the dates set forth below. IN WITNESS WHEREOF: Weld hunty, Colorado Motorola, Inc. By. � S R \ / .�h/� A By C j r — Name: Barbara J. Kirkmeyer Name: LARRY OLSON Chair, VICE PRESIDENT,SALES Title: Board of Cnnnty f:nmmi cci nnerTSitle: - Date: 03/19/00 Date: f= � i0 lc-if- Contract No. 99-13392/shd Page 9 03-14-00 EXHIBIT A SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT EXHIBIT A-SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT EXHIBIT A SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT This Software License Agreement is between Motorola, Inc., a Delaware corporation ("Motorola"), and Weld County, Colorado ("Licensee"). Section 1 SCOPE Licensee may acquire from Motorola's Commercial, Government, and Industrial Solutions Sector ("CGISS") radio communication products ("Products") that contain embedded or pre-loaded Motorola software such as in a ROM, PROM, or EPROM, or other Motorola software provided on media such as a floppy disk, tape, diskette, or CD-ROM. All such software (including Radio Service Software and FLASHport® Software) is referred to as "Motorola Software." In addition, third party software may be included which Motorola does not own but is licensed to distribute. The terms of this Agreement apply to any such third party software unless an additional license agreement pertaining to the third party software is enclosed, in which case the terms of such license apply to said third party software. This Agreement contains the terms under which Licensee may use Motorola Software acquired from CGISS. Section 2 GRANT OF LICENSE Motorola hereby grants to Licensee a personal, non-exclusive license under Motorola's applicable proprietary rights to use Motorola Software in accordance with the terms of this Agreement. Section 3 LIMITATIONS ON USE Licensee may use Motorola Software only for Licensee's internal business purposes and only as described in the Motorola Software or Product documentation. Any other use of Motorola Software is strictly prohibited and will be deemed a breach of this Agreement. Licensee may not copy, modify, adapt, merge with other software, reverse engineer, prepare derivative works of, or disassemble any Motorola Software for any reason, except that Licensee may make at most two copies of Motorola Software provided with infrastructure equipment for back-up purposes. Licensee must purchase a copy of Radio Service Software for each site at which Licensee uses Radio Service Software; Licensee may make one additional copy for each computer owned or controlled by Licensee at each such site. Licensee may temporarily use Radio Service Software on portable or lap-top computers at other sites. Prior to acquiring any Radio Service Software or upon Motorola's request, Licensee must provide a written list of all sites where Licensee uses or intends to use Radio Service Software. Licensee must reproduce all Motorola copyright and trademark notices on all copies of Motorola Software. Section 4 TRANSFERS If Licensee transfers ownership of Products to a third party, Licensee may assign its rights to use Motorola Software (other than Radio Service Software and FLASHport® Software) embedded in or furnished for use with those Products provided that (a) Licensee transfers all copies of such Motorola Software to the new owner and (b) Motorola receives a transfer form (which Motorola will provide upon request) completed and signed by the new owner. Otherwise, Licensee may not transfer or make available any Motorola Software to any third party. Section 5 OWNERSHIP AND TITLE Title to all copies of Motorola Software in any form, including all rights in patents, copyrights, trade secrets, and other intellectual properties, remains vested exclusively in Motorola. Contract No. 99-13392/shd Page 1 03-13-00 EXHIBIT A-SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT Section 6 CONFIDENTIALITY Licensee acknowledges that all Motorola Software contains valuable proprietary information and trade secrets and that unauthorized dissemination, distribution, modification, reverse engineering, disassembly, or other improper use of Motorola Software will result in irreparable harm to Motorola for which monetary damages would be inadequate. Accordingly. Licensee will limit access to Motorola Software to those of its employees and agents who need to use Motorola Software for Licensee's internal business purposes, and Licensee will take appropriate action with those employees and agents to preserve the confidentiality of Motorola Software. Section 7 LIMITED WARRANTY For the first 120 days after initial shipment of Motorola Software, or, if the Motorola Software is provided pursuant to a Communications System Agreement or Communications Equipment Agreement between Motorola and Licensee, for the Warranty Period specified in such Agreement, Motorola warrants that the Motorola Software, when used properly, will be free from reproducible defects that eliminates the functionality of a feature critical to the primary functionality of a system. The primary functionality of a voice communication system is subscriber-to-subscriber, subscriber-to-dispatcher, and dispatcher-to-subscriber voice communication. The primary functionality of a data system is point-to-point data transmission. Motorola does not warrant that Licensee's use of the Motorola Software or the Products will be uninterrupted or error-free or that the Motorola Software or the Products will meet Licensee's particular requirements. This limited software warranty does not include any warranty covering the processing of date data from, into, and between the year 1999 and the year 2000. Any such warranty would be provided expressly in a separately executed agreement. MOTOROLA'S TOTAL LIABILITY, AND LICENSEE'S SOLE REMEDY, FOR ANY BREACH OF THIS WARRANTY WILL BE LIMITED TO, AT MOTOROLA'S OPTION, REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF THE MOTOROLA SOFTWARE OR PAYMENT OF LICENSEE'S DIRECT DAMAGES UP TO THE AMOUNT PAID TO MOTOROLA FOR THE MOTOROLA SOFTWARE OR THE INDIVIDUAL PRODUCT IN WHICH THE MOTOROLA SOFTWARE IS EMBEDDED OR FOR WHICH IT WAS PROVIDED. THIS WARRANTY EXTENDS ONLY TO THE FIRST LICENSEE; SUBSEQUENT TRANSFEREES MUST ACCEPT THE MOTOROLA SOFTWARE "AS IS" AND WITH NO WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND. MOTOROLA DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Section 8 LIMITATION OF LIABILITY IN NO EVENT WILL MOTOROLA BE LIABLE FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Section 9 TERM AND TERMINATION Licensee's right to use Motorola Software will begin when Licensee sends a duly executed copy of this Agreement to Motorola, and either (a) Motorola returns a fully executed Agreement to Licensee or (b) Motorola ships Motorola Software or a Product containing Motorola Software to Licensee, and will continue in perpetuity unless terminated as follows. Licensee's right to use Motorola Software will terminate without notice upon a breach of this Agreement by Licensee. In addition, if Licensee breaches this Agreement with respect to Radio Service Software or FLASHport® Software, Motorola may, by notice to Licensee, terminate Licensee's right to use such Motorola Software. Upon termination, Motorola will be entitled to immediate injunctive relief without proving damages and, unless Licensee is a sovereign government entity, Motorola will have the right to repossess all Radio Service Software and FLASHport® Software in Licensee's possession. Within thirty days after termination of Licensee's right to use any Motorola Software, Licensee must certify in writing to Motorola that all copies of such Motorola Software have been returned to Motorola or destroyed. Contract No. 99-13392/shd Page 2 03-13-00 EXHIBIT A-SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT Section 10 NOTICES All notices, consents, and waivers permitted or required under this Agreement will be deemed given upon receipt and must be delivered in writing to the below addresses. Change of address must be in writing to the other party. Customer Motorola,lnc. Attn: Attn: Contract and Compliance Manager 9980 Carroll Canyon Road _ San Diego, CA 92131 Section 11 GENERAL A. COPYRIGHT NOTICES. The existence of a copyright notice on Motorola Software will not be construed as an admission or presumption that public disclosure of Motorola Software or any trade secrets associated with Motorola Software has occurred. B. CAUSES OF ACTION. Licensee must bring any action under this Agreement within one year after the cause of action arises. C. WAIVERS. No waiver of a right or remedy of a party will constitute a waiver of another right or remedy of that party. D. ASSIGNMENTS. Motorola may assign any of its rights or subcontract any of its obligations under this Agreement, or encumber or sell any of its rights in any Motorola Software, without prior notice to or consent of Licensee. E. ENTIRE AGREEMENT AND AMENDMENT. This Agreement contains the parties' entire agreement regarding Licensee's use of Motorola Software and may be amended only in a writing signed by both parties, except that Motorola may modify this Agreement as necessary to comply with applicable laws and regulations including FCC regulations; Motorola agrees that if any such amendment becomes necessary. Motorola will provide Customer written notice of such amendment within thirty (30) days thereof. F. GOVERNING LAW. This Agreement will be governed by the laws of the United States of America to the extent that they apply and otherwise by the laws of the State to which the Equipment is shipped. In witness whereof, the parties have caused duly authorized representatives to execute this Agreement on the dates set forth below. Licensee Motorola, Inc. By: A*j Name: Barbara J. Kirkmeyer Name: LARRYOLSON Chair, VICE PRESIDENT,SALES Title: Board of County Commissioners Title: Date: 03/29/00 Date: Contract No. 99-13392/shd Page 3 03-13-00 EXHIBIT C ENHANCED SERVICE SUPPORT PLAN EXHIBIT C- ENHANCED SERVICE SUPPORT PLAN EXHIBIT C MOTOROLA ENHANCED SYSTEM SUPPORT PLAN INTRODUCTION Motorola places great emphasis on ensuring that its communications systems meet high standards for design, manufacture, and performance. When communications system failures do occur, Motorola provides support to its customers through a network of service providers including the System Support Center ("SSC"), Motorola Authorized Service Stations ("MSS"), Dealer/Servicer/Preferred Subcontractors ("Subcontractors"), and Company Owned Service Centers ("COSC") for repair service. The Motorola Enhanced System Support Plan ("ESS") describes how repair services will be provided during the warranty period specified in your Communications System Agreement with Motorola. All services described in the ESS will be provided in accordance with the terms of Motorola's Service Agreement and will cover only the Equipment and Software specified on the Service Agreement Order Form. Enhanced System Support will only be provided for those communications systems which have been staged at Motorola's Customers Center for System Integration ("CCSI") located in Schaumburg, Illinois and sold through the Commercial Government and Industrial Solutions Sector (CGISS). Enhanced System Support fees for the warranty period specified in the Communications System Agreement with Motorola are included in the price of the communications system. Additional periods of such support may be purchased at Motorola's then current rates. Unless explicitly noted otherwise, the Motorola Enhanced System Support Plan does not cover any non-Motorola software, non-CGISS software, Radio Service Software or Data product software or those hardware items not specifically staged at CCSI that may be included with the communications system. This Statement of Work provides a general description of how Motorola and the Customer will proceed to perform the services presented. Prior to system Acceptance, a Customer Support Plan will be prepared jointly by Motorola and the Customer. The Customer Support Plan details the specific steps within the support process, and any Customer specific information. The Motorola Enhanced System Support Plan is comprised of the following services which will be described in greater detail elsewhere in this document: Infrastructure Equipment Services • On-Site Infrastructure Repair Service • Preventative Maintenance-SSC Scheduled • Call Management • Infrastructure Board Advanced Replacement • Technical Support • SiteSentry Remote Monitoring/Remote Diagnostics (Smartnet Systems) • FullVision Remote Monitoring/Remote Diagnostics (SmartZone/OmniLink Systems) Subscriber Equipment Repair Service • Subscriber Repair Coverage Contract No. 99-13392/shd Page 1 03-13-00 EXHIBIT C- ENHANCED SERVICE SUPPORT PLAN Software Services • Software Subscription Services II. INFRASTRUCTURE EQUIPMENT SERVICES On-Site Infrastructure Repair Service Description Dispatch of technicians to Customer site(s) in response to Customer requests for service Motorola Responsibilities • Repair defective Equipment which does not conform to Motorola's specifications. • Repair defective Equipment which as a result of normal wear and usage and gradual deterioration of components or drifting of levels. Set appropriate level settings and perform minor system adjustments. • On-site repair service will be provided during regular business hours which are defined as Monday - Friday 8:00 AM to 4:30 PM local business time, excluding holidays. Emergency after hours service will be provided only for Severity 1 issues. Severity One (1) is defined as a complete loss of communication to a site. Customer Responsibilities • Provide full and free access to the Equipment. • Furnish shelter, heat, light and power at no charge. • Control temperature, humidity, and other environmental conditions in accordance with the hardware manufacturer's specifications. • Cooperate fully with Motorola and provide all information pertaining to the hardware and software elements of any system with which the Equipment is interfacing. • Customer is responsible for any site defects including, but not limited to, building shelters, heaters, air conditioners, fans, alarm sensors (smoke detectors, hi-lo temp, entry, AC failure, etc.). • All equipment sites must meet or exceed Motorola's grounding standards found in the R-56 Motorola Site Grounding Manual. Costs associated with meeting this requirement are the responsibility of the Customer. • Customer is responsible for all costs associated with any unusual method of conveyance required to gain access to a service location and/or any fees by a site owner to provide an escort. • Provide information required to complete the Customer Support Plan, Contract No. 99-13392/shd Page 2 03-13-00 EXHIBIT C- ENHANCED SERVICE SUPPORT PLAN Preventative Maintenance-System Support Center Scheduled Description Annual Preventative Maintenance ("PM") check, on the Equipment/System Motorola Responsibilities • Schedule PM visits through the System Support Center's Call Center, on an automatic pre-determined schedule. • Inspect Equipment for compliance with Motorola specifications. • Retain PM records on file for quality control purposes. Customer Responsibilities Provide Motorola with the preferred schedule to perform Preventative Maintenance checks. Call Management Description Motorola's Call Center is staffed with trained Customer Support Representatives that provide a central point of contact for all service requests (1-800-448-3245). The Call Center will receive all calls and dispatch or coordinate appropriate technical support. All requests are tracked and monitored from beginning to end through an electronic Customer Service Request (CSR) number. Motorola Responsibilities • Receive Customer requests for service on a seven day per week/twenty-four hour per day (7x24) basis. • Prompt for information necessary to understand the situation, open a Customer Service Request (CSR) and determine the next steps to take. • Dispatch qualified technical resource and assign the CSR as required. • Notify Customer of technicians arrival at Customer's site (site arrival). • Verify with Customer that repair is complete and system is fully operational. If verification by Customer cannot be completed within 20 minutes, the CSR will be closed, and the technician will be released. • Ensure the required personnel have access to Customer information as needed. • Notify the Customer when work is completed. • Retain records of Customer's Equipment, including performance history and site access requirements. Contract No. 99-13392/shd Page 3 03-13-00 EXHIBIT C-ENHANCED SERVICE SUPPORT PLAN • Provide period performance reports as defined in the Customer Support Plan. • The Customer Support Representatives will monitor the progress of a CSR and will escalate issues to Motorola Management as described in the Customer's customized Customer Support Plan. Customer Responsibilities • Provide Motorola assigned System ID number when placing a request for service. • Provide information required to complete the Customer Support Plan. Infrastructure Board Advanced Replacement Description Replacement of defective Equipment with new or repaired equipment Motorola Responsibilities • Provide access to an inventory of equipment that can be shipped to Customer's site upon request, subject to availability. • Ship Equipment via overnight carrier, unless otherwise specified. Motorola will cover shipping and handling during the normal operating hours of 7:00 AM to 7:00 PM CST. Shipments outside standard business hours or NFO (next flight out) are subject to an additional charge. • Verify and configure all equipment before shipping. • Maintain past and current versions of firmware to ensure the equipment sent to the Customer is programmed correctly. Motorola reserves the right to upgrade at no additional charge to Customer,. • Defective Equipment may be repaired at the System Support Center (SSC) and returned to SSC inventory for future use. Customer Responsibilities • Requests to ship equipment outside of the SSC's regular business hours of Monday - Friday, 7:00 AM - 7:00 PM CST, excluding holidays, are subject to additional charges. • Request must include model description, model number, serial number, type of system, and firmware version. • Provide Motorola with a Purchase Order Number when ordering equipment. (The Customer will not be charged for the use of the service and no invoices will be processed against the Purchase Order unless equipment is not returned within the time frames stated in the Terms and Conditions.) Contract No. 99-13392/shd Page 4 03-13-00 EXHIBIT C-ENHANCED SERVICE SUPPORT PLAN • Malfunctioning Equipment must be sent to the SSC within five working days of receipt of the exchange equipment. Additional charges may be incurred by the Customer beyond that period. • The malfunctioning Equipment returned to Motorola must include all documentation originally sent by the SSC for the return, in order to ensure proper tracking of the return. • The Customer is responsible for return shipment and insurance charges. Technical Support Description Motorola will provide Customer technical staff with centralized telephone support for issues that require a high level of Radio Frequency (RF) expertise or troubleshooting on infrastructure equipment, on a seven day per week/twenty-four hour per day (7x24) basis. Motorola's Responsibilities • Maintain a database with the Customer's administrative and system information, history of service and repairs, and current status of equipment • Escalate support issues to other Motorola engineering and product groups, if necessary. • Maintain its help desk lines on a 7x24 basis. • Maintain and have access to laboratory equipment for system simulations as needed. • Work with the technicians in the field until a solution to the problem has been found. • Coordinate technical resolutions with agreed upon third party vendor(s) as needed. Customer Responsibilities • Supply system information, type of equipment, model and serial numbers. • Supply on-site presence when needed. • Approve any work to be performed. • Allow Motorola remote connectivity to equipment to facilitate diagnostics. Contract No. 99-13392/shd Page 5 03-13-00 EXHIBIT C-ENHANCED SERVICE SUPPORT PLAN SiteSentry Remote Monitoring/Remote Diagnostics (Smartnet Systems) Description Remote monitoring of critical communication Equipment on a seven day per week/ twenty-four hour per day (7x24) basis for single site communications systems equipped with SiteSentry. SiteSentry is a Motorola product that utilizes Motorola's MOSCAD technology. When your single site communications system is equipped with SiteSentry, Motorola will monitor critical components of the communication system on a 7x24 basis. Additional alarming of environment, third party devices, and site conditions can be provided at an additional charge. Motorola Responsibilities • Verify alarms, reporting, and connections at beginning of contract; and periodically thereafter. • Create a Customer Service Request (CSR) and dispatch Field Technician when needed. • Disable and enable alarm system for local technicians who go to the site when intervention is needed. • Verify repair of alarm. • Provide toll free number which permits alarm reporting to the System Support Center. • Provide 7x24 monitoring. Customer Responsibilities • Allow Motorola's remote access to system without notification to Customer. • Allow local site technicians access to Equipment in the event that remote restoration is not possible. • Provide use of on site PSTN line for connection to SiteSentry unit. FullVision Remote Monitoring/Remote Diagnostics (SmartZone/OmniLink Systems) Description Remote monitoring of critical communication Equipment on a seven day per week/ twenty-four hour per day (7x24) basis for SmartZone/OmniLink communications systems equipped with FullVision. FullVision is a Motorola product that utilizes SNMP protocol. When your SmartZone/OmniLink communications system is equipped with FullVision, Motorola will monitor critical components of the communication system on a 7x24 basis. Additional alarming of environment, third party devices, and site conditions, can be provided at an additional charge. Contract No. 99-13392/shd Page 6 03-13-00 EXHIBIT C--ENHANCED SERVICE SUPPORT PLAN Motorola Responsibilities • Verify alarms, reporting, and connections at beginning of contract; and periodically thereafter, • Create a Customer Service Request (CSR) and dispatch Field Technician when needed. • Disable and enable alarm system for local technicians who go to the site when intervention is needed. • Verify repair of alarm. • Maintain connectivity to system via a 56K dedicated frame relay link. • Provide 7x24 monitoring. Customer Responsibilities • Allow Motorola's remote access to system without notification to Customer. • Allow local site technicians access to Equipment in the event that remote restoration is not possible. II. HOW TO OBTAIN SERVICE To obtain service of the infrastructure system during the Enhanced System Support Plan period, the Customer must call the Motorola System Support Center at 1-800-448-3245 and identify themselves by using their assigned System ID number, and providing the name of the caller and Customer. Should a request for service not be covered by the Motorola Enhanced System Support Plan, Motorola will contact the Customer and provide an estimate for the requested service. The Service Center will await authorization and a purchase order number from the Customer to proceed with the repair. If an emergency response, not covered by the Motorola Enhanced System Support Plan, is required, Motorola will perform repairs which are necessary to minimize downtime of the equipment, and will contact the Customer during the next business day to obtain a purchase order number for the Repair. IIV. SUBSCRIBER EQUIPMENT REPAIR SERVICE Subscriber Repair Coverage Description Motorola will provide repair services to the subscriber equipment listed on your Motorola Service Agreement Order Form. Motorola Responsibilities • Repair defective mobile and/or portable radios which do not conform to Motorola's specifications as a result of normal wear and usage and gradual deterioration of components. Contract No. 99-13392/shd Page 7 03-13-00 EXHIBIT C-ENHANCED SERVICE SUPPORT PLAN • Advise Customer of the approximate date the unit will be repaired, should the unit require repairs beyond first echelon. • Notify the Customer in the event of repairs not covered by the Motorola Enhanced System Support Plan ("Above Warranty Repairs") and provide quote to repair. • Await approval from Customer in order to proceed with Above Warranty Repairs. • Test units for proper functioning once repair is complete. • Contact Customer by telephone when repaired unit is available for pick-up. Customer Responsibilities • Deliver Subscriber units to the Authorized Motorola Service provider at the Servicer's location (indicated on the front of your Motorola Service Agreement Order Form), during normal business hours, Monday - Friday 8:00 AM to 4:30 PM local business time, excluding holidays. • Attach to each radio needing repair a tag with the following information: Customer information, department number if applicable, and brief description of problem, if known. • Provide a purchase order number in the event of Above Warranty Repairs. V. SOFTWARE SERVICES Software Subscription Services Description Motorola will provide software subscription services as listed below for the Motorola Software applicable to the upgrade capable Motorola communication equipment that is in the Customer configuration identified on the Service Agreement Order Form. For purposes of these services, the following definitions apply: "Core Release" — A new version of Software which adds Features and major enhancements. These new versions are signified by changes to the first digit of the version identifier number (e.g. SmartZone 2.0.3 to SmartZone 3.0). "Enhancement Release"—A superseding issue of Software which adds to, improves, or enhances the performance of Software Features contained in the then currently shipping Software version. These releases are signified by changes to the second digit of the version identifier number(e.g. SmartZone 3.1 to SmartZone 3.2). "Feature"—A Software functionality. "Standard Feature" — An additional software functionality for components of Customer's system that is available to Customer in the standard software release. "Optional Feature" —An additional software functionality issued with a Core Release that is available to Customer at additional cost. Contract No. 99-13392/shd Page 8 03-13-00 EXHIBIT C-ENHANCED SERVICE SUPPORT PLAN Motorola Responsibilities • Provide Customer notice bulletins announcing Enhancement and Core Releases. • Provide Software Enhancement Releases applicable to Features provided to Customer by Motorola under this Agreement and as ordered by Customer from the notice bulletins. • Provide those Standard Features included in a Core Release which apply to Customer's existing system components. • Optional Features issued with a Core Release are not provided pursuant to the Software Subscription Program but are available to Customer, as a Program subscriber, at a discounted price under a separate agreement. The discount available to Customer for voice system Optional Features will be 20% off the current Motorola list price. Customer Responsibilities • Customer must contact its Motorola representative upon receiving a bulletin in order to receive Enhancement or Core Release. • Customer is responsible for payment of any charges associated with additional engineering or hardware required for each Enhancement Release or Core Release that it chooses to install. Additional engineering may be required if Customers system previously had specially developed options. • Contact a local service provider for installation assistance, if required. • Customer is encouraged to upgrade the Motorola software operating on its system with the most current Enhancement and Core Releases. If Customer chooses not to install a new software release or enhancement, however, customer acknowledges that by so choosing, it may limit or eliminate the applicability of future releases or enhancements to its system. • Use the Software and releases in accordance with the terms of the Motorola software license agreement executed by Customer, or Motorola's standard software license terms, if no license was signed. Contract No. 99-13392/shd Page 9 03-13-00 EXHIBIT D SERVICE AGREEMENT EXHIBIT D-SERVICE AGREEMENT EXHIBIT D SERVICE AGREEMENT THIS SERVICE AGREEMENT is entered into by and between Motorola, Inc. ("Motorola") and Weld County, Colorado ("Customer"). Section 1 DEFINITIONS "Service Agreement" means this Service Agreement and its Attachments; "Equipment" means, collectively and in part, the communication equipment that is specified in the Attachments or that is subsequently added to this Service Agreement. Section 2 ACCEPTANCE The terms and conditions set forth in this Service Agreement and in Attachments will become the Service Agreement only when acknowledged and accepted in writing by Motorola's Schaumburg, Illinois Service Department. Section 3 SERVICE DEFINED A. Motorola agrees to provide services for the Equipment as specified in the Attachments and in accordance with the following standards: (i) Motorola parts or parts of equal quality that are new or are warranted as "like new" will be used; (ii) the Equipment will be Serviced at levels set forth in Motorola's product manuals; and (iii) routine service procedures that are prescribed from time to time by Motorola for its products will be followed. B. All communication equipment purchased by Customer from Motorola ("Additional Equipment") that is part of the same communications system or of similar type as the Equipment covered under this Service Agreement will be automatically added to this Service Agreement and will be billed at the applicable rates after the warranty period has expired. Motorola may also provide additional services ("Above-Contract Services") at Customer's request that will be billed at Motorola's then applicable service rates. C. All Equipment must be in working order on the Start Date of the Service Agreement or at the time the Equipment is added to the Service Agreement. Customer must provide a complete serial number and model number list either prior to the Start Date or prior to the time that the Equipment is added to the Service Agreement and must indicate in the Attachments any Equipment that is labeled intrinsically safe for use in hazardous environments. D. Customer must immediately notify Motorola in writing when any Equipment is lost, damaged, or stolen. Customer's obligation to pay Service fees for such Equipment will terminate at the end of the month in which Motorola receives such written notice. E. If Equipment cannot, in Motorola's good faith reasonable opinion, be properly or economically serviced for any reason including excessive wear, unavailability of parts, the state of technology, or the practical feasibility of the scope of Services as specified in the Attachments or Motorola Statement of Work, Motorola may: (1) modify the scope of Services related to such Equipment; (2) remove such Equipment from Service Agreement; or (3) increase the price to Service such Equipment. F. Customer must notify Motorola or Motorola's Subcontractor immediately of any Equipment failure. Motorola will respond to Customer's notification in a manner consistent with the level of service purchased as indicated in the Attachments. Contract No. 99-13392/shd Page 1 03-13-00 EXHIBIT D-SERVICE AGREEMENT Section 4 EXCLUDED SERVICES A. Service does not include the repair or replacement of Equipment that has become defective or damaged due to physical or chemical misuse or abuse from causes such as lightning, power surges, or liquids. B. Unless specifically included in the Attachments, Service does not include repair or maintenance of any transmission line, antenna, tower or tower lighting, duplexer, combiner, or multicoupler. Motorola has no obligation or responsibility for any transmission medium, such as telephone lines, computer networks, or the worldwide web, or for Equipment malfunction caused by such transmission medium. C. Unless specifically included in the Attachments, Service of Equipment does not include items that are consumed in the course of normal operation of the Equipment, such as, but not limited to, batteries, magnetic tapes, and computer supplies. D. Service does not include reprogramming of Equipment; accessories, belt clips, or battery chargers; custom or Special Products; modified units; or software. E. Service does not include certification programs, software support, reprogramming, or modifications to Equipment related to assuring the correct processing, providing, or receiving of date data from, into, or between the year 1999 and the year 2000. Section 5 RIGHT TO SUBCONTRACT/ASSIGNMENT Motorola may assign its rights and obligations under this Service Agreement and may subcontract any portion of Motorola's performance called for by this Service Agreement. Section 6 TIME AND PLACE OF SERVICE Service will be provided at the location specified in the Attachments. When Motorola performs service at the Equipment's location, Customer agrees to provide Motorola, at no charge, a non- hazardous environment for work with shelter, heat, light, and power and with full and free access to the Equipment. Customer will provide all information pertaining to the hardware and software elements of any system with which the Equipment is interfacing that enable Motorola to perform its obligations under this Service Agreement. Unless otherwise specified in the Attachments, the hours of Service will be hours of 8:30 a.m. to 4:30 p.m., excluding weekends and holidays. Section 7 PAYMENT Motorola will invoice Customer in advance for each payment period. All other charges will be billed monthly, and Customer must pay each invoice within thirty (30) days of the invoice date to the Motorola office designated by Motorola. Customer agrees to reimburse Motorola for all property taxes, sales and use taxes, excise taxes, and other taxes or assessments (except income, profit, and franchise taxes of Motorola) now or hereafter imposed on this Service Agreement by any governmental entity. Motorola does not by this Agreement make any price guarantees except as stated in the Order Form. Section 8 WARRANTY Motorola warrants that its Services under this Service Agreement will be free of defects in materials and workmanship for a period of ninety (90) days beyond the expiration or termination of this Agreement. Customer's sole remedies are to require Motorola to re-perform the affected Service or to refund, on a pro-rata basis, the Service fee paid for the affected Service. MOTOROLA DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING, Contract No. 99-13392/shd Page 2 03-13-00 EXHIBIT D-SERVICE AGREEMENT WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Section 9 CERTIFICATION DISCLAIMER Unless signed by a Motorola authorized signatory, Motorola specifically disclaims all certifications regarding the manner in which Motorola conducts its business or performs its obligations under this Service Agreement. Section 10 DEFAULT/TERMINATION A. Customer agrees to provide Motorola written notice of any default of this Service Agreement to state the nature of the default. Noncompliance with regulatory laws or disadvantaged business entity requirements may not be cause for default. If Motorola does not cure the default within sixty (60) days, Customer may terminate that portion of the Service Agreement that is in default by giving Motorola thirty (30) days prior written notice. B. Any dispute will be resolved by mutual agreement. C. Neither party is liable for delays or lack of performance resulting from any causes such as strikes, material shortages, or acts of God that are beyond that party's reasonable control. Section 11 LIMITATION OF LIABILITY Notwithstanding any other provision, Motorola's total liability for losses, whether for breach of contract, negligence, indemnity, warranty, or strict liability in tort, is limited to the price of twelve months of Services sold. IN NO EVENT WILL MOTOROLA BE LIABLE FOR LOSS OF USE, LOSS OF TIME, INCONVENIENCE, LIQUIDATED DAMAGES, COMMERCIAL LOSS, LOST PROFITS OR SAVINGS. OR OTHER INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES TO THE FULL EXTENT SUCH MAY BE DISCLAIMED BY LAW. Section 12 EXCLUSIVE TERMS AND CONDITIONS A. Customer acknowledges that the Service Agreement supersedes all prior and concurrent agreements and understandings, whether written or oral, related to the services performed. The Service Agreement or Attachments may not be altered, amended, or modified except by a written agreement signed by both parties. B. Customer agrees to reference this Service Agreement on all purchase orders issued pursuant to this Service Agreement. Neither party will be bound by any terms contained in Customer's purchase order or elsewhere (even if it is attached to the Service Agreement). In the event of a conflict between the main body of this Service Agreement and any Addenda or Attachments, the main body of this Service Agreement will take precedence, unless the Addendum or Attachment specifically states otherwise. Section 13 FCC LICENSES AND OTHER AUTHORIZATIONS Customer is solely responsible for obtaining licenses or other authorizations required by the Federal Communications Commission ("FCC ") or any other federal, state, or local government agency and for complying with all rules and regulations required by such agencies. Neither Motorola nor any of its employees is an agent or representative of Customer in any governmental matters. Section 14 OWNERSHIP OF INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY A. This Service Agreement does not grant directly or by implication, estoppel, or otherwise, any ownership right or license under any Motorola patent, copyright, trade secret, or other Contract No. 99-13392/shd Page 3 03-13-00 EXHIBIT D-SERVICE AGREEMENT intellectual property including any intellectual property created as a result of or related to the products sold or Services performed under this Service Agreement. B. Motorola reserves the right to limit access to its confidential and proprietary information including cost and pricing data. Section 15 GENERAL TERMS A. If any court renders any portion of this Service Agreement unenforceable, the remaining terms will continue in full force and effect. B. THIS SERVICE AGREEMENT AND THE RIGHTS AND DUTIES OF THE PARTIES WILL BE GOVERNED AND INTERPRETED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE LAWS OF THE STATE OFCOLORADO. C. Failure to exercise any right will not operate as a waiver of that right, power, or privilege. D. Except for money due upon an open account, no action may be brought for any breach of this Service Agreement more than one (1) year after the accrual of such cause of action. E. The Service Agreement will begin on the Start Date specified in the Attachments. This Service Agreement will renew, for an additional one year term, on every anniversary of the Start Date unless either party notifies the other of its intention to discontinue the Agreement within thirty days of that anniversary date. F. If Motorola provides Service after the termination or expiration of this Agreement, the terms and conditions and any prices in effect at the time of the termination or expiration will apply to that Service. Weld CCounty, Colorado Motorola, Inc. By. VjCyE�J By: _r� c, - L Name: Barbara J, Kirkmeyer Name: tJ1RRyOLSON Chair, VICE PRESIDENT,SALES Title: Board of County CommissionerTitle: _ Date: 03/2q/nn Date: f 3 - / Li ._ firs Contract No. 99-13392/shd Page 4 03-13-00 EXHIBIT D-SERVICE AGREEMENT Attachment 1 to Service Agreement List of Equipment to be Serviced Contract No. 99-13392/shd Page 1 03-13-00 EXHIBIT D SOFTWARE SUBSCRIPTION AGREEMENT EXHIBIT D-SOFTWARE SUBSCRIPTION AGREEMENT EXHIBIT D SOFTWARE SUBSCRIPTION AGREEMENT This Motorola Software Subscription Agreement ("Agreement") is between Motorola, Inc., a Delaware corporation ("Motorola") by and through its Commercial, Government, Industrial Solutions Sector (CGISS) and Weld County, Colorado ("Customer"). Section 1 DEFINITIONS "Core Release" — A new version of Software which adds Features and major enhancements. These new versions are signified by changes to the first digit of the version identifier number (e.g. SmartZone 2.0.3 to SmartZone 3.0). "Enhancement Release" — A superseding issue of Software which adds to, improves. or enhances the performance of Software Features contained in the then currently shipping Software version. These releases are signified by changes to the second digit of the version identifier number(e.g. SmartZone 3.1 to SmartZone 3.2). "Feature"—A Software functionality. "Standard Feature" — An additional software functionality for components of Customer's system that is available to Customer in the standard software release. "Optional Feature" — An additional software functionality issued with a Core Release that is available to Customer at additional cost. "Special Product Feature" — Features specially developed for Customer which contain Customer unique functionality. Section 2 SUBSCRIPTION PROGRAM During the term of this Agreement, Motorola will provide Customer with the software subscription services described below ("Software Subscription Program") for upgrade capable Motorola communication equipment that is in the Customer configuration identified in Exhibit A to this Agreement. Non-Motorola manufactured software, Non-CGISS software, and Radio Service Software (RSS), are excluded from the Software Subscription Program. A. Motorola will provide periodic Motorola Software Enhancement Releases applicable to Features currently provided to Customer by Motorola under a Software License Agreement. Customer is responsible for the purchase of additional hardware that is necessary to upgrade to the newly issued Enhancement Release. B. Motorola will provide those Standard Features included in a Core Release which apply to Customer's existing system components. Customer is responsible for the purchase and license of additional products, hardware, and/or software that are necessary to migrate to the newly issued Core Release. C. Optional Features issued with a Core Release are not provided pursuant to the Software Subscription Program but are available to Customer, as a Program subscriber, at a discounted price under a separate agreement. The discount available to Customer for voice system Optional Features will be 20% off the current Motorola list price. The discount available to Customer for data system Optional Features will be 15% off the current Motorola list price. Once an Optional Feature is provided to Customer, Customer will be entitled under this Agreement to all Enhancement Releases for that Optional Feature. Contract No. 99-13392/shd Page 1 03=13-00 EXHIBIT D-SOFTWARE SUBSCRIPTION AGREEMENT D. Special Product Features previously developed by Motorola unique to Customer's system may require additional engineering effort to be incorporated into a Enhancement Release or Core Release so that the Special Product Feature will not be overwritten upon its installation. Upon request, Motorola will determine whether a Special Product Feature can be incorporated into a Enhancement Release or Core Release and whether additional engineering effort is required. Customer will be responsible for all charges associated with any additional engineering required for each Enhancement Release or Core Release that it chooses to install. Such equipment and engineering are not included as part of the Software Subscription Program and may be provided pursuant to a separate agreement. E. Motorola will issue to Customer at the below address bulletins announcing Enhancement Releases and Core Releases. If Customer desires to obtain the announced Enhancement Release or Core Release, it must contact its Motorola representative. If needed, Customer should contact its local service provider for installation assistance. Customer Contact for Bulletin Receipt Customer: Address: Attn: F. Because Enhancement Releases may include minor performance enhancements, Customer is encouraged to periodically upgrade the Motorola Software operating on its System with the most current Enhancement Release (e.g. SmartZone 3.0.1 to SmartZone 3.0.2). Customer may choose not to install a new software release, however, customer acknowledges that by so choosing, it may limit or eliminate the applicability of future releases to its system. G. Because the Software Subscription Program includes Enhancement Releases for only the currently shipping software version and those prior versions that Motorola may be supporting during the term of the Agreement, Customer is encouraged to migrate the Motorola Software operating on its Communications System to the most current Core Release (e.g. SmartZone 2.0.3 to SmartZone 3.0). If Customer's system is not maintained to a currently supported software version, all Core Releases and Enhancement Releases may not be compatible with Customer's existing System. Additional hardware, Motorola Software, and engineered modifications may be required if Customer desires to migrate to a particular Core Release or Enhancement Release. Such additional hardware, Motorola Software and engineering are not included as part of the Software Subscription Program and may be provided pursuant to a separate agreement. If the size and complexity of Customer's System warrants, Motorola may provide consultation services to determine the technological, operational and financial impact of installing a particular Core Release or Enhancement Release on the System, pursuant to a separate agreement. Section 3 FEES AND PAYMENT Exhibit A contains the annual SSA program fees and payment terms. The fees listed are based upon Customer's current Motorola equipment configuration as indicated in Exhibit A. Customer must promptly notify Motorola of any change in this configuration and Motorola will calculate revised fees (effective at the beginning of the next subscription year) based on the new configuration. Motorola will refund to Customer any amounts previously paid for SSA program fees that are reduced due to a new configuration. If the SSA program fees are increased due to a new configuration, Customer will pay any additional amounts within thirty days after receipt of an invoice from Motorola. Section 4 TERM AND TERMINATION A. The term of this Agreement is indicated in Exhibit A and shall terminate at the expiration of that term unless extended by mutual agreement of the parties. Contract No. 99-13392/shd Page 2 03=13-00 EXHIBIT D-SOFTWARE SUBSCRIPTION AGREEMENT B. The Customer may terminate this Agreement at any time prior to the expiration of its term by providing written notice of such termination to Motorola. Such termination will be effective at the next annual anniversary date following Motorola's receipt of the written notice. Motorola will refund to Customer any pre-paid Software Subscription Program fees for the terminated period. C. The Agreement will automatically terminate if, at its annual anniversary date, the software version in Customer's then current configuration is no longer supported by Motorola or if Motorola discontinues the Software Subscription Program, in which case Motorola will refund to Customer any pre-paid Software Subscription Program fees for the terminated period. Section 5 TAXES Customer is responsible for all taxes due as a result of this Agreement, if any, other than taxes based on Motorola's income; if Customer is a tax-exempt entity, upon execution of this Agreement, Customer must provide Motorola with tax exemption certificates from the appropriate tax authorities. Section 6 EXCLUDED SERVICES The SSA program does not include repair or replacement of hardware or software defects not corrected by the Enhancement Releases and Core Releases nor does it include repair or replacement of defects resulting from any nonstandard or improper use or conditions or from unauthorized installation of Motorola software. Section 7 OWNERSHIP AND USE OF SOFTWARE All rights and title to Motorola software furnished to Customer under this Agreement remains vested exclusively in Motorola. Customer's use of such Motorola software is subject to the terms of the Motorola software license agreement executed by Customer or, if no such agreement has been executed, Motorola's standard software license terms apply, which will be sent to Customer upon written request. Section 8 DEFAULT Motorola at any time may suspend subscription services or terminate this Agreement if (a) Customer fails to pay any fees within thirty days after such fees are due, (b) Customer fails to correct a breach of this Agreement within thirty days after notice from Motorola of such breach, (c) Customer's right to use Motorola software under a Motorola software license agreement expires or is terminated, or (d) Customer replaces its Motorola communication system with a non-Motorola communication system. Upon such termination, any unpaid SSA program fees will become immediately due and payable. Section 9 LIMITATION OF LIABILITY MOTOROLA'S TOTAL LIABILITY ARISING FROM THIS AGREEMENT WILL BE LIMITED TO THE AGGREGATE AMOUNT OF SSA FEES PAID TO MOTOROLA BY CUSTOMER. IN NO EVENT WILL MOTOROLA BE LIABLE FOR SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Section 10 GENERAL A. NOTICES: All notices, consents, and waivers permitted or required under this Agreement will be deemed given upon receipt and must be delivered in writing to the below addresses. Change of address must be in writing to the other party. Contract No. 99-13392/shd Page 3 03=13-00 EXHIBIT D-SOFTWARE SUBSCRIPTION AGREEMENT Customer Motorola, Inc. Attn: Attn: Contracts & Compliance Manager 9980 Carroll Canyon Road San Diego, CA 92131 B. FORCE MAJEURE: Motorola will not be liable to Customer for any failure to perform services due to events beyond Motorola's reasonable control including labor disruptions. C. WAIVERS: No waiver of a right or remedy of either party will constitute a waiver of another right or remedy of that party. D. ASSIGNMENTS: Customer may not assign any of its rights under this Agreement without Motorola's prior consent. E. ENTIRE AGREEMENT AND AMENDMENT: This Agreement, along its Exhibit A, contains the parties' entire agreement regarding the SSA program and may be amended only in a writing signed by both parties, except that Motorola may modify this Agreement without joint consent as necessary to comply with applicable laws, rules, and regulations, Motorola agrees, however, that if any such amendment becomes necessary, Motorola will provide Customer written notice of such amendment within thirty (30) days thereof. F. GOVERNING LAW: This Agreement will be governed by the laws of the State of Colorado Weld C unty, Colorado Motorola, Inc. Name: Barbara J . Kirkmeyer Name: LARRYOLSON Chair, VICE PRESIDENT,SALES Title: Board of County Commissionetsle: Date: 03/29/00 Date: _ L i L/ ( ' Contract No. 99-13392/shd Page 4 03=13-00 ATTACHMENT 1 TO EXHIBT D (SSA) ATTACHMENT 1 TO EXHIBIT D SYSTEM CONFIGURATION ATTACHMENT I TO EXHIBIT D (SSA) SYSTEM CONFIGURATION Choose and complete only ONE of the sections below: I. DataTAC System SSA Number of Network Controllers in Operation Number of Data Subscriber Devices in Operation (Forte, VRM, etc.) IP Messaging for DataTAC (Yes/ No) RNC Redundancy for DataTAC (Yes/ No) Network Management for DataTAC (Yes/ No) Mobility Management for DataTAC (Yes/ No) Security Services for DataTAC (Yes/ No) II. SmartZone System SSA Number of Sites (in addition to the Prime Site) Number of Repeaters in Operation Number of Subscribers in Operation (Mobiles and Portables) OmniLink Operation (Yes/ No) _ Digital Operation (Yes/ No) III. SmartNet System SSA (Single Site or Simulcast) Number of Remote Sites (in addition to the Prime Site) Number of Repeaters in Operation Number of Subscribers in Operation (Mobiles and Portables) Digital Operation (Yes/ No) _ IV. Conventional System SSA Number of Repeaters in Operation Number of Subscribers In Operation (Mobiles and Portables) _ Digital Operations (Yes/ No) V. Console Only SSA (not required if System SSA is purchased) Number of Operator Positions Number of Channels VI. Centralink 2000 USA Contract No. 99-13392/shd Page 1 03-13-00 ATTACHMENT 1 TO EXHIBIT D SYSTEM CONFIGURATION SSA TERM Beginning of Term (choose one only) Expiration of existing Subscription Period (renewal) Immediately upon execution of Software Subscription Agreement Other (please specify date) Length of Term (number of years: 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5) SSA PROGRAM FEES Annual Fees (before discount) System SSA Fee Console Only SSA Fee CENTRALINK 2000 SSA Fee SP Coverage Quote Total Annual Fee (before discount) Multi-Year Discount Level (choose the discount corresponding to the length of term) u 1 Yrs. 0% 0 2 Yrs. 0% 0 3 Yrs. 5% 0 4 Yrs. 5% 0 5 Yrs. 10% Total Annual Fee (after discount) Total Fees during Term Chosen _ Payment Methods (check only one): (A) Payment of total Fees due upon execution of SSA (B) Payment of Annual Fee due upon first day of each subscription year (C) Other (specify) Contract No. 99-13392/shd Page 2 03-13-00 Phase I System Proposal Weld County P25 SmartZone System PHASE I SYSTEM PROPOSAL TABLE OF CONTENTS 1. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 1 1.1 INTRODUCTION 1 1.2 PHASE I DESIGN 2 1.2.1 Sites 3 1.2.2 ITAC Channel 3 1.2.3 System Operation 3 1.2.4 Expandability 4 1.2.5 Interoperability 4 1.2.6 Coverage 5 1.3 ASTROTM FDMA DIGITAL OVERVIEW 6 1.3.1 Audio Quality 7 1.3.2 Encrypted Audio Option 9 1.3.3 Compatibility and Interoperability 10 1.4 SMARTZONE TRUNKING SYSTEM 11 1.4.1 SmartZone Capabilities 11 1.4.2 What Is SmartZone? 11 1.4.3 SMARTNET Trunking Features 16 1.5 SYSTEM AND NETWORK MANAGEMENT l3 1.5.1 Overview 33 1.5.2 SmartZone Manager 36 1.5.3 Hardware Configuration 36 1.6 MIGRATION AND EXPANDABILITY 43 1.7 RELIABILITY 44 1.7.1 Reliability Features 46 1.8 EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION 55 1.8.1 Master Site 55 1.9 SYSTEM ELEMENTS 60 1.9.1 CENTRACOM Consoles 60 1.9.2 QUANTAR IntelliRepeater 77 1.9.3 ASTRO Digital Interface Unit 81 1.9.4 XTS 3000 Portable Radio 83 1.9.5 ASTRO Digital Spectra Mobile Radio Overview 90 1.10 MOSCAD FAULT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 99 1.10.1 Overview 99 1.10.2 General MOSCAD Features 102 1.10.3 Overview of MOSCAD Master Central 103 1.10.4 Summary 106 MOMOTOROLA Attachment B--3/13/2000 Table of Contents :• i Confidential and Proprietary PHASE I SYSTEM PROPOSAL TABLE OF CONTENTS 2. ACCEPTANCE TEST PLAN 1 2.1 STAGING ACCEPTANCE TEST PLAN 2.2 ATP TEST DOCUMENTATION 2 2.3 SITE ACCEPTANCE TEST PLAN 2 2.3.1 "Punch List"Procedure 2 2.4 COVERAGE ACCEPTANCE TEST PLAN i 2.4.1 Overview 2.4.2 Development of CATP 3 2.4.3 Areas Excluded From Coverage Testing 3 2.4.4 Coverage Acceptance Criteria 2.4.5 Coverage Acceptance Test Plan Methodology 4 2.4.6 Coverage Test Prerequisites and Preparation S 2.4.7 Coverage Test Equipment 6 2.4.8 Coverage Testing Procedure 7 2.4.9 Analyzing Data and Generating Reports 8 2.5 SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE TEST PLAN R 2.5.2 Final System Acceptance 10 2.5.3 Certificate of System Acceptance 11 Attatchment "A" 13 Sample Trunking Features and System Tests 13 CENTRACOM Elite Consoles 21 Network Management System 41 Radio Control Manager 44 Security Management 45 Failure Scenarios 46 Attatchment "B" 50 3. STATEMENT OF WORK l 3.1 PURPOSE OF STATEMENT OF WORK 3.2 MOTOROLA SYSTEM RESPONSIBILITIES(GENERAL) 3.3 WELD COUNTY SYSTEM RESPONSIBILITIES (GENERAL) 2 3.4 SITE PREPARATION 2 3.4.1 Grounding and Surge Suppression 3 3.4.2 Electrical 3 3.4.3 Equipment Space 3 3.4.4 Environmental Conditions 3 3.4.5 Earthquake Bracing 4 3.4.6 Site Access 4 3.4.7 Towers 4 3.5 SYSTEM IMPLEMENTATION 4 3.5.1 Factory Staging 5 3.5.2 Installation and Optimization of Fixed Equipment 5 3.6 ACCEPTANCE TEST PROCEDURES 5 C@@M Attachment B--3/13/2000 Table of Contents ❖ ii Confidential and Proprietary PHASE I SYSTEM PROPOSAL TABLE OF CONTENTS 3.7 MOBILES AND PORTABLES 6 3.7.1 Fleetmap and Templates 6 3.8 TRAINING 6 3.9 SYSTEM DOCUMENTATION 6 3.9.1 Design Documentation 6 3.9.2 CCSI Documentation 7 3.9.3 System Manual- "As-Built"Documentation 7 3.10 SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE 8 3.11 PROJECT SCHEDULE L0 3.11.1 Change Order Procedure 10 3.12 WORK BREAKDOWN STRUCTURE 12 MOMoroaoua Attachment B--3/13/2000 Table of Contents :• III Confidential and Proprietary Section 1 System Description Weld County SmartZone System TABLE OF CONTENTS 1. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 1 1.1 INTRODUCTION 1 1.2 PHASE I DESIGN 2 1.2.1 Sites 3 1.2.2 ITAC Channel 3 1.2.3 System Operation 3 1.2.4 Expandability 4 1.2.5 Interoperability 4 1.2.6 Coverage 5 1.3 ASTROTM FDMA DIGITAL OVERVIEW 6 1.3.1 Audio Quality 7 1.3.2 Encrypted Audio Option 9 1.3.3 Compatibility and Interoperability 10 1.4 SMARTZONE TRUNKING SYSTEM l 1 1.4.1 SmartZone Capabilities 11 1.4.2 What Is SmartZone? 11 1.4.3 SMARTNET Trunking Features 16 1.5 SYSTEM AND NETWORK MANAGEMENT 33 1.5.1 Overview i3 1.5.2 SmartZone Manager 36 1.5.3 Hardware Configuration i6 1.6 MIGRATION AND EXPANDABILITY 43 1.7 RELIABILITY 44 1.7.1 Reliability Features 46 1.8 EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION 55 1.8.1 Master Site 55 1.9 SYSTEM ELEMENTS 60 1.9.1 CENTRACOM Consoles 60 1.9.2 QUANTAR IntelliRepeater 77 1.9.3 ASTRO Digital Interface Unit 81 1.9.4 XTS 3000 Portable Radio 83 1.9.5 ASTRO Digital Spectra Mobile Radio Overview 90 1.10 MOSCAD FAULT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 99 1.10.1 Overview 99 1.10.2 General MOSCAD Features 102 1.10.3 Overview of MOSCAD Master Central 103 1.10.4 Summary 106 OMorono A Attachment B--3/13/2000 Table of Contents ¢• i Confidential and Proprietary 1 . SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 1.1 INTRODUCTION Weld County has expressed a desire for an improved countywide communications system. The primary objectives for improving the system are: d• Increased number of talkgroups (communication channels) ❖ Interoperability with other State and Local Public Safety Agencies ❖ Replace aging conventional systems with State of the Art technology Weld County has determined that it is mutually beneficial to partner with the State of Colorado in the building of an APCO Project 25 (P25) SmartZoneTM System. This proposal is for Phase I of a multi-phase build-out. Upon completion of all phases, Weld County will have several sites located throughout the county linked with the SmartZoneTM OmniLinkTM infrastructure. SmartZone is an integrated network formed by a number of individual trunked radio systems linked together through a common network. SmartZone operates in a way that is similar to a cellular network. Both types of networks provide a system where various sites or cells are linked to provide communications while roaming over a large geographic area. SmartZone provides the flexibility to roam transparently from cell to cell, as the system performs an automatic hand-off between cells. At this time, Weld County is planning to have four sites located in various places throughout the county. These sites will be connected to a SmartZone switch that will allow any unit operating on any of these sites to communicate with any other unit operating on the sites. In addition, the State of Colorado will have several sites that will be connected to the SmartZone switch. Weld County will also have access to these sites to provide wide area coverage in Weld County and beyond. Many other public safety agencies will utilize this wide area system. Some agencies may not be on the same system but will operate on similar systems in the 800MHz frequency range. Through the use of interagency talkgroups and Mutual Aid Channels, Weld County will be able to communicate with these public safety agencies. Phase I of the system build-out will include two (2) IR(IntelliRepeater) sites and six control stations. Each of the two IR sites will have five (5) IntelliRepeaters, a channel bank, MOSCAD alarm equipment, a transmitter combiner, a receiver multi-coupler and two (2) antennas with transmission line. The 35th Ave site will be equipped with a UPS to allow for a smooth transition to generator backup in the event of a power failure. The West site will have a battery system for backup power. The two sites will be connected to the Douglas County Zone Controller until Weld County purchases OM Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 1 ❖ 1 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 1 ❖ SYSTEM DESCRIPTION their own Zone Controller in Phase II. Six control stations will be connected to the Weld County Central Electronic Bank(CEB) using tone controlled Base Interface Modules (BIMs)to provide dispatch with access to the system in Phase I. The two sites will have MOSCAD alarm and maintenance equipment to be monitored at the Douglas County main site. The monitoring point will be moved to Greeley in Phase II of this project. In addition to the trunking equipment, Greeley will supply one 800MHz conventional channel with an ITAC repeater frequency. This channel can be used by any public safety agency for mutual aid situations. The channel will be located at an undetermined State site in the east part of the County. The County is providing this repeater and the State will provide the antenna combining system and the link back to the Weld County Dispatch Center. In Phase II Weld County will purchase an APCO Project 25 (P25) compliant Zone Controller to be installed at the State facility in Greeley. The two existing sites will be connected to this Zone Controller, as will several of the States sites. The sites and existing field units will be upgraded, using FLASHportTM technology, to P25. Weld will add one new IR site to the system as part of Phase II. The Weld County Dispatch Center will be integrated into the system by upgrading the existing CEB, adding a new CEB and adding one operator position. The two CEBs will be interfaced directly into the SmartZone switch. Motorola is committed to providing the latest digital technology. Motorola's unique FLASHportTM capability is the County's assurance that their ASTRO SmartZone system will remain on the leading edge of technology. FLASHport enables the County to add new features and capabilities to their radios as they become available. FLASHport enables smooth migration into the future. All repeaters, mobiles, portables and control consoles can be migrated to MultiZone capability and APCO 25 using FLASHport technology. 1.2 PHASE I DESIGN Weld County and the State of Colorado have agreed upon three (3) sites in the City of Greeley for Phase I of the system build-out. Weld County will provide two of the sites and the third will be provided by the State. In addition, the State will add several other sites in the northeast part of the state to provide wide area coverage. In the first phase, all of these sites will be connected to the Douglas County Zone Controller. The system will operate in the digital mode only using the APCO CAI (Common Air Interface) format. Until the system is upgraded to the APCO P25 standard the system will operate on a 3600bps control channel. The sites will be equipped with MOSCAD Alarm and Control equipment to allow for easy monitoring and maintenance. Each site will be connected to the Main site in Douglas County using T1 circuits provided by the State. It will be Weld County's responsibility to enter into an Inter-Governmental CM)M Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 1 C 2 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 1 ❖SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Agreement (IGA) with Douglas County to reserve connectivity for the two sites and the MOSCAD interface. Weld County will also have an IGA with the State to provide the required connectivity to the main site. 1.2.1 Sites Weld County will have two (2) IR sites in Phase I. One of the IR sites will be located at the 35th Ave tower. The second site will be located in the Windor area and is referred to as the West site. Each site will have the following. •I• Five (5)IntelliRepeaters 4• One (1) six channel Transmitter combiner • One (1) 12 port Receiver multi-coupler •3 One (1) Premisys Channel bank ❖ Two (2) Antennas with line and surge protection d• MOSCAD Alarm Network The 35th Ave. site will be configured for 110 V AC only. The site will have a County- supplied generator for backup power. Motorola will provide a UPS at the site to transition to generator power when primary power fails. The West site will be configured for-48 volts D.C. Motorola will provide batteries and chargers for the site. If the County does not provide a generator for the site, the backup run time will be approximately four to six hours. 1.2.2 ITAC Channel Weld County will provide one Conventional 800 MHz repeater to be used as a mutual aid channel. The repeater will be located at one of the State repeater site. Weld County will provide: d• One (1) 800Mhz Repeater with tone wireline control The State will need to equip the site with Transmitter and Receiver ports into the antenna combining network. They will also need to provide a 4-wire audio connection back to the Weld County Dispatch Center. 1.2.3 System Operation The IntelliRepeater sites provide trunking operation without the presence of a separate trunked controller. An IntelliRepeater is a QUANTARTM repeater with additional processing capability that allows it to perform the functions of a remote site controller. °MOTOROLA Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 1 •: 3 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 1 4. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION When an IntelliRepeater is performing the site controller functions, it is known as the active master. One IntelliRepeater at each trunking site will perform the duties of the active master. All IntelliRepeaters are equipped with the memory and software necessary to perform the active master duties, if required. The IntelliRepeater can be used as a voice channel and perform the duties of active master. The active master IntelliRepeater communicates with the other IntelliRepeaters at the same site using an Ethernet link. The active master IntelliRepeater coordinates the call processing for that site. If the control channel repeater fails, one of the other stations will take over as the control channel. If the active master's software should fail, another IntelliRepeater will assume the active master functions. If the link between the IntelliRepeaters and zone controller is broken, the system will revert to local trunking at that particular site. Audio and control data from each of the five IntelliRepeater sites is collected at the Master Site and forwarded to the Master Control equipment. Equipment at the Master Control Site sorts radio calls by talkgroup, assuring that users are free from interference caused by unrelated radio calls originating from other agencies operating on the system. The SmartZone audio switch routes the audio back to the transmit sites needed to include all users operating on the talkgroup. Channels are keyed only at sites required to include all field units on the talkgroup in use. The SmartZone controller controls this process, referred to as dynamic channel assignment. The Motorola SmartZone system uses channel resources in the most efficient manner possible. 1.2.4 Expandability Motorola SmartZone trunking systems have 48,000 unit IDs and 4,000 talkgroup IDs that afford tremendous expansion capabilities. Bringing on new agencies and more units presents no problem. Console operator positions and SmartZone Management terminals can be added, with some additional hardware and software. Other common system elements can also be added without complex design and cost considerations. Expansion of area coverage is also possible. 1.2.5 Interoperability The following descriptions point out many interesting and useful features of SmartZone. These features are available to all users and groups in the system. Many will enhance and expand the content of communications within the various County agencies. Also of interest is the wide area coverage and unifying operability the system provides. (M)Morowou► Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 1 ❖ 4 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 1 ❖SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Now, each and every user in the County can be programmed to talk with any other agency or user. The convenience is boundless. For example, users while traveling to the county jail will now be linked to their local jurisdictional resources, while being available for wide area groups and even the jail talkgroup when necessary. Interoperability is also more flexible. Users in the County jurisdictions can be programmed for State talkgroups, and visa versa. All units are programmable for many group access. Analog and digital units can converse on common use talkgroups on the same system. There are few limits with SmartZone. And with the ASTRO digital system, the benefits of digital audio and range add to the serviceability. Secure encryption is available with the digital system, but units are never limited to that mode. They can revert to other digital groups or analog with the simple radio knobs available to them. 1.2.6 Coverage The capacity and expandability of the Motorola SmartZone architecture allows sites to be added as needed to enhance coverage. The Phase I system design was developed primarily to provide coverage to Greeley and surrounding areas. Coverage prediction maps have been produced to assist in the selection of the sites that would provide the best signal density in this area. The maps show where "on street coverage" can be expected for portable radios. They also show where the signal density is high enough that building penetration can be expected. The maps are, however, only a prediction and serve as a tool to assist in the selection of sites. Motorola does not guarantee that all buildings in the area of high signal density will be penetrated. Motorola will, however, test the on-street signal levels to assure that the Phase I system is performing as expected and that the signal density is in accordance with the coverage prediction maps. The test procedure is documented in the CATP (Coverage Acceptance Test Plan). The system will be expanded in multiple phases in accordance with the State/County Plan. The initial intended build-out for the County was a nine (9) site system. This has been modified so that Weld County will have only four(4) sites. The remainder of the sites will be provided by the State. It has also been discussed that it maybe desirable to make the three sites in the Greeley area into a Simulcast Sub-system at some point in time. This may be desirable to enable smoother transitions for the coverage of one site to the coverage of another site for these three sites that are relatively close in proximity. However, at this time, these sites will be switched using the SmartZone site switching technology. Upgrading to Simulcast in not currently in the system build-out plan, but could be added at additional cost if desired. The digital interface to IntelliRepeater and the TeNSr channel banks allow the elimination of extensive (and costly) interconnection and documentation. The OMOTOROLA Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 1 •: 5 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 1 ❖SYSTEM DESCRIPTION interfaces are greatly simplified eliminating any chance or wiring errors. The MOSCAD approach allows for the seamless integration of alarm information to a single operator interface. 1.3 ASTROTM FDMA DIGITAL OVERVIEW Motorola's Phase I offering to the County includes ASTRO: Motorola's world class technology that is a quantum leap over anything that exists in the world today and will dramatically affect the performance and capabilities of the new County Phase I system. Motorola's ASTRO is a revolutionary digital communications platform and signaling format. Outlined in the chart below are a few of ASTRO digital benefits. An in-depth discussion of these features and benefits is found in the following section. Table 1: ASTRO System Advantages ASTRO System Advantages Benefit Improved audio quality Consistent audio quality throughout coverage area for all public safety users Advanced embedded signaling Improved efficiency and system features for public features safety users - Secure audio capability Prevents eavesdropping and unauthorized use Improved compatibility and Backward compatible with existing systems and interoperability forward migratable to future systems; protects system investment Improved system coverage Industry leading stability to ensure the highest alternatives and advanced and efficient possible audio quality system design Project 25 system characteristics Cost effective migration path to current and future digital standards, reduced exposure to risk ASTRO is the first available digital radio platform capable of meeting the Project 25 Common Air Interface (CAI) digital guideline. The CAI is the guideline for radio-to- radio, over-the-air digital signal compatibility and interoperability for Public Safety organizations. This means that mobile and portable equipment from any manufacturer that meets the CAI standard may be freely combined in a Project 25 compliant system. ASTRO's unique features and implementation translate into benefits that improve radio communications in many different ways. ASTRO is designed to improve system control, to enhance user safety, to maximize communications security, and to provide outstanding system growth potential. (M)MoronoL A Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 1 ❖ 6 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 1 $• SYSTEM DESCRIPTION With the ASTRO digital system, personnel will be able to use their new portable radios to communicate in many areas where it is not now possible; improving the quality of services delivered to the members of the County and increasing the safety of both citizens and public safety personnel. 1.3.1 Audio Quality ASTRO significantly enhances audio quality. Analog transmissions are subject to fade and flutter noise when signal strength decreases. Transmissions from portable radios inside buildings are sometimes hard to understand because of signal loss and fading. In an ASTRO system, total system coverage in terms of usable audio quality is better than an equivalent analog system. Good • m.�,....-...w.,. DIGITAL Audio Quality ANALOG Poor V E � Strong Signal Strength Weak Figure 1: Digital vs.Analog In analog systems, signal strength decreases as it gets further from the transmitter. This means audio becomes increasingly degraded because the signal level drops. All too common are cases in which the signal level meets minimum requirements but the message is marginal at best. In an ASTRO system, the audio quality in these instances is just as good as if the user were standing right under the base antenna. ASTRO captures even degraded voice data and reproduces voice accurately. In an ASTRO system, audio quality remains constant to the fringe area. Consequently, the audio quality will have a uniformly higher quality throughout the coverage area. ASTRO solves the problems peculiar to analog with improvements in three areas. 1) ASTRO's system design is based on bit error rate and forward error correction, not on signal strength. Bit error rate measures the number of errors in a received signal and the ability of the radio to detect these errors. Forward error correction is a technique used to minimize bit errors; 2) Narrowband systems have an inherent improvement because the receivers are tighter, offering better protection from adjacent channel interference. Closely OMoronoLA Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 1 •. 7 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 1 ❖SYSTEM DESCRIPTION related to this is the Four-Level QPSK-C modulation technique, which will be discussed later; and 3) The improvement in coverage comes from the nature of the ASTRO signal framing and error correction coding. The radio is capable of detecting and correcting errors caused by transmission noise. If the errors are too great, the receiver simply mutes the audio stream for that audio segment and moves on to the next the receiving radio will miss 30 milliseconds of audio at the most. With an ASTRO digital system, the audio quality remains consistent as the user travels away from the signal. At the very outer edges of coverage, the audio quality begins to get weaker and then rapidly diminishes. Digital signaling in a trunked radio system was first introduced in the commercial marketplace by Motorola in the mid 1970's. Motorola has since used digital signaling in its Privacy Plus, SMARTNET, and SmartZone systems. Other manufacturers have since incorporated this technology into their trunked systems. The systems in use today employ analog, two-level, FSK type modulated signals, not digital Four-Level QPSK-C type modulated signals. Two-level modulated systems have serious limitations when it comes to simulcast. ASTRO systems use next-generation digital technology to provide fully digital systems. Extra bits can accomplish: ❖ Elimination of preamble voice truncation ❖ Continuous ID with receive ID displayed on field units ❖ Selective calling ❖ Elimination of audible "chirps"during signaling ❖ Improved encryption capabilities The ASTRO system is leading-edge technology that will carry the County well into the twenty-first century. QPSK-C and Four-Level modulation are new technologies, unlike two-level FSK type systems that have been in the industry since the 1970's. Project-25 has already adopted QPSK-C as the modulation for its Digital Standard Foundation. tiA)M000sroLA Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 1 ❖ 8 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 1 ❖ SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 1.3.2 Encrypted Audio Option ASTRO digital technology itself provides a level of inherent security that keeps casual eavesdroppers with analog scanners from listening to the County's conversations. However,because digital scanners are likely to be developed and radios can be lost or stolen, an encryption algorithm is required for comprehensive security. Adding encryption capability to the radio is the only way to be sure no one is eavesdropping. With ASTRO digital encryption, there are no longer any tradeoffs when adding encryption for secure communications. The County does not have to compromise voice quality, coverage, or voice truncation for secure communication, as would be the case in pseudo-digital systems. The County should consider this option for users with critical and secretive communications needs. The options for encryption can be added unit-by-unit and all units will be capable of full, system-wide use, not disconnected from non-encrypted users. ASTRO voice encryption is the most advanced form of digital encryption commercially available for two-way radio. ASTRO digital voice protection uses a very sophisticated coding technique. The analog radio signal is first converted to a digital signal, and then it is encrypted. It is then transmitted. All radios equipped with the same ASTRO key can receive the encrypted signal, decipher it, and convert it to an audio quality equal to clear operation. Any device monitoring the trunking frequency that does not have the proper ASTRO key will register only"white noise". Each ASTRO algorithm has a unique key that can be programmed into each radio using the key loader. There are roughly 79 octillion possible variations in the algorithm, and each reflects a unique security code. The key loader allows the System Supervisor to vary the ASTRO key as often as desired. If the system's security is breached, the key can simply be changed, thus locking out the lost or stolen radio from secure voice conversations. 1.3.2.1 Encryption Techniques The ASTRO voice encryption system employs a synchronous technique called Counter Addressing. This continual re-synchronization corrects errors and keeps the communicating radios in synch. Because ASTRO uses a synchronous technique, noise or bit errors that might occur affect the encrypted system coverage in the same way that they affect a clear system; therefore, the communications range of the coded ASTRO encryption is equal to that of the clear system. MOmoronoLA Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 1 9 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 1 ❖ SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Secure Channel Steering The County can equip all or a portion of their fixed network for ASTRO encryption. Software within the SmartZone controller allows for steering to a repeater subset capable of secure voice. Secure Features d• Auto Coded/Clear Receive—The Auto Coded/Clear Receive is a standard feature, in the fixed end that ensures the receipt of every message. The system will automatically notify the receiving radios of the mode of the call, regardless of whether the radio is in the secure mode or the clear mode. This will insure that the radios will always hear every call directed to them. If a member of the user's talkgroup initiates a call in the clear mode and a listener is in the coded mode, or vice-versa, the user will still hear the message. • Clear Mode Alert—ASTRO portables, mobiles, and consoles feature Clear Mode Alert on transmit as a standard option. Clear Mode Alert is an audible tone that alerts the operator as the push-to-talk button is depressed when the radio is set to transmit in the clear or unprotected mode. ❖ Mode Strapping—When making a call from a mobile or portable radio, the user must use the selector switch to select the proper talkgroup. Depending on whether the call is in the coded or clear mode, the user would normally move the coded/clear switch to the proper position. Mode Strapping eliminates that step by making the radio's coded/clear transmissions talkgroup dependent. This feature is programmed into the radio. Changes require reprogramming of that radio. The customer decides which talkgroups are coded and which are clear. 1.3.3 Compatibility and Interoperability ASTRO radios can send both analog signals and ASTRO digital signals. This means that a mixture of analog and digital SMARTNET radios can coexist on the same system. Users who do not need digital radios can use analog radios. Subsequent users who are issued digital radios can talk to either digital or analog users directly over the air. The County may decide to incorporate non-ASTRO radios into the system. An ASTRO system has the flexibility of incorporating both digital and analog radios, thus reducing costs for users who do not require digital communications. C)MoronoLA Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 1 :• 10 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 1 ❖SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 1.4 SMARTZONE TRUNKING SYSTEM 1.4.1 SmartZone Capabilities SmartZone is Motorola's premier solution to wide area communications. With over 100 wide area systems in place, Motorola is the industry leader in network radio solutions. We have created from extensive experience the most comprehensive and "user friendly" system ever developed to control multiple radio sites. SmartZone will transparently link dispatch and field personnel, tracking each radio from site to site and group to group. Radio sites are automatically assigned and connected for wide area calls, allowing a dispatcher or field unit to effortlessly reach another radio - no matter where the person is located in the service area. RightSite--an exclusive set of features included with the Motorola SmartZone system processes calls seamlessly, efficiently, and transparent to system users. SmartZone technology meets the demands of Public Safety and accommodates analog and digital voice, digital signaling, encryption, and the latest digital breakthroughs in communications. Motorola is certain that it will provide all the capabilities the County seeks in a wide area digital system. 1.4.2 What Is SmartZone? 1.4.2.1 Integrated Wide-Area Network SmartZone is the next generation trunking system that meets the need for communications over large geographic areas. It provides the highest level of effortless user roaming, efficient use of channels, coverage capability, and system reliability. SmartZone expands on Motorola's advanced SMARTNET II technologies in the following areas: ❖ Larger geographic areas covered d• Efficient channel use ❖ Maximized traffic throughput • Fault tolerant design Cross band communications d• Integrated management control SmartZone is a communications network that is similar to a cellular network. Both types of networks provide a system where various sites or"cells" are linked to provide OM Morowoua Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 1 •1 11 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 1 ❖ SYSTEM DESCRIPTION communications while roaming over a large geographic area. However, SmartZone integrates many more features that make it better suited to a public safety communications solution. SmartZone is an integrated network formed by a series of individual systems tied together. Each system (or site) is tailored to meet the needs of the specific area. For example, Rogen or Keenesburg may have little communication traffic on a day-to-day basis. These sites would use"low density trunking". This means that only the number of channels required are installed to support the communications traffic at each site. The Greeley area will require more channel capacity. This concept of tailoring each site allows for the most cost-effective system design. Zone Controller •1.,* Audio Switch rr� Simulcast Thinking Low Density ■ e! IR Trunking \ t Mutual Aid Channel Figure 2: Weld County SmartZone System: A mixture of various sites is included in the SmartZone network. 1.4.2.2 State-of-the-Art Digital Equipment These are the basic pieces of equipment that are integrated in the Weld County SmartZone system: Master Site Equipment, IntelliRepeaters, and the SmartZone Manager. Each of the others is discussed in more detail below. Integrated Call Routing and Audio Processing The Master Site equipment consists of all new designs. These designs incorporate the latest digital technology in the most cost efficient manner. There are two important pieces of equipment at the Master Site. These, when integrated, perform all the call processing and audio routing for the entire network. The first is the system controller, or Zone Controller, which is a fault tolerant computer performing functions similar to that of the central controller in a single-site trunked system. The other is the Audio CM)wrorowoLA Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 1 12 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 1 ❖ SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Switch, which routes the audio for wide-area calls between sites. The Zone Controller processes calls and tells the Audio Switch which channels and sites must be connected to support a wide-area call. The Zone Controller's software is divided into two areas: call processing and resource management. The call processing functions include: receiving call requests, radio site registrations and talkgroup affiliations. The remote sites check call access privileges, queue calls as required, select and assign available channels at all sites, issue call grants to requesters, plus monitor, control, and set up each call sequence in the system. The resource management portion of the software includes the control and setup of the Audio Switch and managing the database containing information pertaining to all the users, talkgroups and site information. The Audio Switch connects the correct audio paths under the direction of the Zone Controller. It uses digital switching techniques to provide uncompromised audio quality. Zone Controller The Zone Controller is a modular and expandable multi-processor computer system that utilizes multiple Motorola MC68040 microprocessors. This multitasking computer supports wide area call processing coordination, in conjunction with remote site channel assignments. In addition, the controller is connected with the Audio Switch to handle call requests and wide area channel assignments. In this way, the Zone Controller is always up to date on the status of the remote sites and can assign channels and groups throughout the system. OM0T0R0LA Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 1 •:• 13 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 1 ❖ SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Zone Controller Redundant --e Disk HA Drives Fe Tape Disk Disk j Drive Drive pl Drive I:141 A Redundant Power mosite 41 lerSupplies Interfaces ,I Redundant c:,1 mg \ CPU's AEB Interface AEB Interface outa Figure 3: Fault Tolerant Trunking: The Zone Controller is able to withstand multiple points of failure and still provide call processing without any performance degradation. Communications with your radio users are assured—even in the event of a failure. Integrated Backup Modules The Counties fault tolerant Zone Controller incorporated in the County's Phase I system design has backup modules for each operating module in the controller. If there is any point of failure in this unique controller, the backup module automatically takes over. The occurrence is then reported to the SmartZone Manager. This provides completely uninterrupted call processing for the system. The Zone Controller and Audio Switch are closely related pieces of equipment. The Audio Switch routes voices to the appropriate sites and dispatchers under direction from the Zone Controller. If one of the main boards in the Audio Switch fails, a backup board immediately takes over. If one of the other boards fails, that portion of the switch will be disabled, but the remaining functions will still be active. Audio Switch As mentioned before, the Audio Switch is co-located with the Zone Controller. The purpose of the Audio Switch is to tie together the conversations of wide area user groups, which are located at multiple sites. The Audio Switch works under the direction of the Zone Controller through high-speed links. CM)Morowoa..s Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 1 :• 14 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 1 ❖ SYSTEM DESCRIPTION When a call request takes place, the Zone Controller acknowledges the call and sets up a channel at sites where talkgroup members are located. The setup occurs through the data link which exists between the remote sites and the Zone Controller. Simultaneously, the Zone Controller directs the Audio Switch to connect the appropriate sites and channels together to support the wide area conversation. This processing takes place at a very high speed to permit channel access time in less than 500 milliseconds. When the conversation is over, the Zone Controller informs the Audio Switch to disconnect existing audio links between sites. The Audio Switch is Motorola's Ambassador Electronics Bank. It is configured with redundant hardware and is field serviceable. To ensure system reliability, each component is continually checked by diagnostic software running within the system. In the unlikely event of a component failure, that piece of hardware is isolated from the system and a service alarm indication is issued. Field service is easily accomplished through hot pull-out (unique to the Motorola design) hardware design and board level failure indications for fast isolation of a failed part. The Audio Switch will interface with each of the remote sites through T1 circuits. These circuits can be composed of leased lines, microwave, or even fiber optics as long as the input to the switch is a T1. This efficient design is less costly, since there is no need for extra channel cards to convert the digital signal back to 4-wire audio for input to the Audio Switch. IntelliRepeater New technology allows the remote sites to work without a Central Trunking Controller at each site. The IntelliRepeater is the name of the new base station operating with this technology. Adding the intelligence to the repeater eliminates the need for a controller so there is less cost involved with the purchase and in on-going maintenance. Each IntelliRepeater has the capability of communicating with the Zone Controller and directing activity at the remote site. The IntelliRepeater configuration allows for a fully fault tolerant remote site. The failure of one repeater(even the one acting as the controller) does not impact the features available at that site. Full trunking features are retained even in the event of a failure. This greatly increases the safety of your radio users by ensuring continued communications. Through the Fault Management menu on the SmartZone Manager Terminal, the user will be able to view current system alarms, alerts, system status, and history of system components. The user will also be able to perform diagnostics and review current system resources and capabilities. OMOTOROLA Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 1 •. 15 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 1 ❖SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 1.4.3 SMARTNET Trunking Features With SmartZone, SMARTNET signaling and protocol of the digitally trunked control channel are extended to a wide area network. SmartZone technology provides wide area radio system users with system flexibility never before attained in a two-way radio network. Enhanced capabilities and network intelligence provide unequaled communications levels for all your communications needs. SmartZone builds on Motorola SMARTNET trunking technology to provide an integrated approach to communications throughout your entire operating area. SmartZone combines the features of SMARTNET trunking with the advanced integration of radio sites to form an integrated wide area communications network. A few of the many SMARTNET features that are incorporated into SmartZone are summarized below. 1.4.3.1 System Access Features To ensure system access, simplify radio operation, and limit operator involvement, the SmartZone system has many unique access features: ❖ Talk Prohibit Tones—Although trunked systems are considerably more efficient than conventional systems, there occasionally may be times when all the channels are busy. A user depressing their PTT while the system channels are in use will be given a"telephone type"busy signal until either a channel is assigned or the user releases their PTT. Furthermore, an out-of-range tone is given whenever the radio cannot immediately access the system because it is out of range. ❖ Busy Queuing/Call Back—Any users requesting system access when all voice channels are in use are put into a queue and are assigned a channel via preassigned priority levels, then on a FIFO (First-In-First-Out)basis. When a channel becomes available, the Zone Controller notifies the first radio in queue by calling the user back. This call back consists of a short series of beeping tones heard over the operator's radio. This unique feature makes it unnecessary for the radio operator to waste valuable time rekeying their radio in an effort to gain channel access. ®MOTOwOLA Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 1 ❖ 16 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 1 ❖SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ❖ Automatic Retry—If a channel request is not received at the Zone Controller because of bad signaling conditions or interference, the individual radio unit continues sending in channel requests until the request is acknowledged by the Controller, or until a total of 16 automatic retries (which occur within four seconds) have been exhausted by the unit. This "automatic retry" feature eliminates the need for the operator to continually key and de-key their radio or to keep their radio keyed in an effort to gain system access. Once the automatic retry process begins, it will continue to its conclusion automatically even though the operator has released their PTT. As an added feature to ensure system access, the automatic retry timing is random to eliminate the possibility of contention on the control channel. ❖ Recent User Priority—To ensure uninterrupted communications, a recent radio user priority provides those users who have been recently assigned a voice channel priority over the other system users. Recent user priority ensures that a talkgroup engaged in a conversation receives priority system access for up to 10 seconds between transmissions. ❖ Misdirected Mobile Protection —As added assurance that no mobile from one talkgroup could accidentally be assigned to a voice channel being used by a different talkgroup, the system utilizes a subaudible data handshake. Once a talkgroup is assigned a voice channel, the repeater for that channel continues to send an outbound stream of intelligent, subaudible data containing the unique talkgroup ID of the units using the channel. If a unit from a different talkgroup is accidentally assigned the same channel, the radio will not recognize the outbound data and will automatically revert to the control channel. ❖ Continuous Assignment Updating—Once a talkgroup is assigned a voice channel, the control channel continues to transmit the channel assignment for as long as that talkgroup is using the channel. This ensures that a mobile/portable just coming into service will be sent to the appropriate voice channel to join the rest of its talkgroup. The assignment updates are sent serially, and the total time required by the control channel to run through 19 assignments on a 20-channel system is less than 1 second. OMOTOROLA Attachment B--311312000 Section 1 :• 17 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 1 ❖SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 1.4.3.2 User Call Features Emergency Alarm/Call If a radio user is in a critical or life-threatening situation, that person needs to be able to request help immediately. The emergency button on a SmartZone trunked radio addresses that situation. In emergencies, the dispatch center is notified immediately, regardless of whether the system is busy. The user simply presses the emergency button on the radio and the emergency alarm automatically displays at the dispatcher positions. The alarm is both audible and visible, displaying the radio user's ID. To reassure the user, an acknowledgment will be sent back to the initiating radio confirming that the message was received. Additionally, each unit in the emergency caller's group will be alerted to the emergency condition and will display the emergency caller's numeric unit ID. If one or more voice channels are available, one of those channels will be assigned immediately to the emergency call when the user presses the PTT switch. The channel will be dedicated to the emergency caller and his or her talkgroup for up to 30 minutes. If the console dispatcher desires, the duration of the emergency call can be indefinite (unique to Motorola). Two alternatives are provided for handling emergency traffic during busy periods: 1) Top of the Queue--When an emergency call is requested from the radio and no channel is available, the emergency user is put first in the queue and all repeaters are set to operate in the transmission trunked mode to speed the channel grant process. As soon as the first user on any channel de-keys, the emergency caller is assigned that channel. The major advantage to this approach is that there is no contention for the channel; and 2) Ruthless Preemption --When the emergency button is depressed on a radio, a repeater that is currently in use is assigned to the emergency calling unit. The Zone Controller selects the repeater assigned to the lowest priority user and assigns it to the emergency caller. Multiple Priority Levels To allow your users with more important information to be able to access the system ahead of less important users, SmartZone provides ten (10) priority levels. Priority 1, which is the highest priority, is always reserved for emergencies while priorities 2 through 10 can be assigned by the System Manager on a per radio basis. These priorities are only applicable when the system is busy. t@)Morofoa.n Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 1 C. 18 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 1 ❖SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Multi-Group Call Multi-group call is used to make a simultaneous call to multiple talkgroups. The System Manager can program this call to operate in one of two ways: 1) User waits for all requested talkgroups to finish any calls in progress; or 2) When a user initiates a multi-group call, that call immediately interrupts other conversations in progress without waiting for other users to de-key. Those radio users who are transmitting on a voice channel will not hear the call until they de-key. They will then join the call if it is still in progress. Everyone in a multi- group call is message trunked, which allows all units to have talk back capability. Dispatch Console/Talkgroup Merge Talkgroup merge is a dispatch function which allows multiple talkgroups to be patched together on one voice channel for the duration of a call, at which time the dispatcher can disengage the merged talkgroups. This function is a standard feature of CENTRACOM Gold EliteTM consoles. A major benefit of this feature is channel efficiency, since only one voice channel is used by the talkgroups. 1.4.3.3 Selective Calling Features Call Alert—Call Alert allows a dispatcher or radio user to selectively alert an individual's radio so the individual knows that someone is trying to reach them. The signaling is done over the control channel and does not affect the efficiency of the voice channels. The Call Alert produces an audible and visual alert on the receiving party's radio. Receipt of the Call Alert is acknowledged by indicators on the initiating caller's radio. If the receiving unit is a display style radio, it will display and store the calling unit's ID. ❖ Private Conversation —Private Conversation allows a radio user or console dispatcher to selectively call and carry on a private conversation with another individual radio. The user must switch their radio into the Private Call mode, enter the ID of the party to be called, and press the PTT to initiate this type of call. The caller will be able to reach an individual unit as long as that unit is not already on a voice channel. The calling unit will receive an acknowledgment of a successful Private Call. If the receiving radio has display capabilities, it will show the calling party's unit ID. MOMOTOROLA Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 1 C 19 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 1 ❖ SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 1.4.3.4 SmartZone System Enhanced Features One of the primary objectives of SmartZone is to provide the user with seamless and effortless roaming throughout the service area. When traveling between sites users will not have to touch controls on the radio to change sites. The system will automatically register the users to the new site and update the SmartZone database to reflect the change. All of this is accomplished through an exclusive set of features of SmartZone known as RightSiteTM. RightSite is an array of features incorporated into SmartZone that assures that users are always on the optimum site. The right site is the one that will provide the best coverage and audio clarity for each user no matter where they are in the system. The features of RightSite that make this possible are: ❖ Enhanced Automatic Unit Registration + Automatic Unit Deregistration ❖ Dynamic Site Assignment • Receive Signal Strength Indication (RSSI) ••• Busy Override ❖ Preferred Site Assignment ❖ Variable Density Sites Enhanced Unit Registration A key element of a SmartZone wide area system is the enhanced SMARTNET function of Automatic Unit Registration. The RightSite feature known as Enhanced Unit Registration ensures that the individually addressed subscriber units continually inform the Master Site of any change in operational status. The radio registration information contains the individual radio ID and the current group selected by the radio. This is forwarded to the Zone Controller via the RS232 data link. The Zone Controller creates records for each work group, radio unit, and radio site location. Enhanced site registration occurs when a radio is turned on, the push-to-talk switch is depressed, the talk group selector on the radio is changed, or when the radio switches sites. In this way, the Zone Controller is always kept up to date on the most current status of every radio operating in the system. This feature improves communications reliability because the radio user never has to switch channels and does not risk getting lost in the system. (M9www-rowoua Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 1 20 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 1 ❖SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Automatic Deregistration In addition too automatic site registration, the SmartZone system also performs automatic de-registration of units that are operating on the system. hi order to maximize system resources, the system needs to know where each user is and when a user no longer needs access to the system. In a system without radio de-registration, "phantom"radios can exist in the system. These are radios that are not active but are still registered with the controller. This may cause channels to be allocated for a call in an area where no user is monitoring the talkgroup. This wastes channels that can be used for other traffic in the cell. There are three basic forms of de-registration. An example of the first type of de- registration is SmartZone's site change feature. When a radio unit moves from one site to another, the radio will automatically register at the new site. Correspondingly, the Zone Controller de-registers the radio at the old site. This ensures that channels are always used efficiently at every site, and only where talkgroup members are located. A second form of de-registration is through a time-out-timer. If a radio unit drives out of range of the system, it will be unable to communicate or inform the system that it is out of range. To combat this, an inactivity timer is established at the Zone Controller. If radio activity is not encountered during a specified period of time, the Master Site will interrogate the radio at the last active site. If the radio answers, the Zone Controller will update its list and reset the timer. If however, the radio does not send an acknowledgment, the Zone Controller removes the unit from "active" status and de-registers it from the system. This ensures that all channel resources are used for maximum call efficiency. With Enhanced Automatic Unit Registration, any the radio coming back into range of the system automatically re-registers with the Zone Controller for immediate system access. Thus, user communications reliability is maintained. A third form of de-registration occurs when a radio unit is turned off. The radio unit will perform a Soft Power Down and de-register with the system. The Zone Controller then removes this radio from its "active" list. The RightSite combination of pro-active site switching, automatic radio registration and radio de registration simplifies user operation while ensuring that frequency resources are utilized efficiently throughout the system. OMoronoLA Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 1 C. 21 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 1 ❖ SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Dynamic Site Assignment Dynamic Site Assignment is a RightSite feature that ensures that your system will have maximum system efficiency by utilizing channels only at sites where active talkgroup members are located. Dynamic site assignment allows each talkgroup conversation to take place independently without tying up channels at a site where no members of those talkgroups are located. in Figure 4, Sites 1 and 3 are utilized for a police call leaving channels at site 2 available for other users such as a fire talkgroup. Dynamic site assignment permits the most efficient use of limited channels. re n4 `t t _ m . : a • Figure 4: Dynamic Site Assignment Saves Resources: Only sites required for communications are assigned channels. This leaves channels at other sites free for other communications. (iM)asorowos n Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 1 22 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 1 ❖SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Uninterrupted Call Hand-off There are two approaches to handling calls as a user drives between sites. The call can be successfully handed off or the call can be dropped, which requires the user to re- access the system before continuing the call. Many early systems, and even some systems on the market today without automatic call hand-off, will lock onto a site, long after the signal, and resultant voice communications, are very poor. When the signal finally gets weak enough, it will drop the unit from communicating. The unit will then have to re-establish contact with another site, not always the best site, and re-key the radio to establish communications. Throughout this process the user can only hope that a site is available and not busy or that the other party is still available for conversation. Obviously, the failings of this type of operation created great dissatisfaction among system users. ... aa • .c - — • Figure 5: Communications May Be Lost if Calls Are Not Handed Off: In the non- SmartZone approach, your radio users may be out of communications while their radios transition from site to site. MOmOTOOOLA4 Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 1 :• 23 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 1 ❖ SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Transparent Roaming With SmartZone, radio users do not have to change their radio controls to choose a new site. As users roam through the network, they will likely travel from one site to another. SmartZone radios automatically will register at the new site without user intervention. Switching sites in a SmartZone system is transparent to the users. SmartZone's advanced roaming features provide continuous communications across your service area. As a radio moves from the coverage area of one site into the coverage area of another, the radio automatically registers with the new site. The SmartZone controller updates its database to reflect the new location, and removes the radio from the list for the previous site. hi this way, the SmartZone system continuously tracks users and provides communications, regardless of location. 'H o a - m Figure 6: No Call Interruption While Traveling: /n SmartZone, all calls are handed off between sites so your radio users are always in communication. �M�w+oTosroi.a Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 1 :• 24 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 1 ❖SYSTEM DESCRIPTION If an individual is talking to the dispatcher or talkgroup, the call is "handed off' and is continued at the new site without user intervention. This includes both dispatch calls and telephone interconnect calls. Radio users can be assured that when they roam, whether they are involved in a call or not, their radios will switch sites as needed, without operator intervention. The decision to change sites, and which sites to change to is based on Received Signal Strength Indication (RSSI). Receive Signal Strength Indication (RSSI) This exciting RightSite enhancement provides a SmartZone system with seamless hand-off between sites. Receive Signal Strength Indication (RSSI) enables subscriber units to measure the signal strength of adjacent radio site control channel signals. In this manner, the radio will automatically lock on to the site with the best signal strength and clearest audio quality. This pro-active site switching requires no radio user action. SmartZone radios are designed to automatically choose the site with the best signal. Your important calls get through the first time. Advanced Call Processing With RSSI radio users do not have to change their radio controls to choose a new site. As users roam through the network, they will likely travel from the coverage of one site to another. SmartZone radios automatically will register at the new site without user intervention. Switching sites in a SmartZone system is transparent to the users because of SmartZone's advanced call processing. Without a method such as this, a radio would switch sites only after it loses the signal at the existing site, taking the radio off the air for a short time. Radios on such a system would experience severe audio degradation and "holes"before the site switching took place. (MOTOROLA Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 1 C. 25 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 1 +SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Without Y.a M Figure 7: Non-Intelligent Roaming: Radios not equipped with RSSI will stay locked onto noisy or weak sites, even when a better site may be available. The radio will not switch until the signal is so bad that it is lost completely. Without the use of Receive Signal Strength Indication, audio quality within the system may be compromised as a unit roams from one site to another. In fact, in systems operating without RSSI, the radio completely loses the signal before beginning to search for a new site. Even then, the radio will choose the first site in range—not necessarily the site with the strongest signal! ®Mo-rowoua Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 1 + 26 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION With 4 B Figure 8: Intelligent Roaming: Radios equipped with RSSI will pro-actively search for a better site to use for communications. When a site is determined to be better than the current site, the radio automatically switches. With RSSI, each radio user's radio pro-actively searches the surrounding sites and searches for the strongest signal. The radio continually monitors the signals to determine which site is "best." Once any of the signals is detected as significantly higher than the current signal, the radio will switch to the that "best site". This provides the user with clear, reliable communications throughout the service area of the system. SmartZone ensures that calls switch from site-to-site with automatic call hand-off, that the system tracks each and every user in the system, and that each user gets the best possible signal when communicating. All of these features add up to clear, continuous communication! SmartZone gives users effortless access to the site that will provide the highest audio quality communications. This ensures that communications get through the first time. M°MOTOROLA Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 1 ❖ 27 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 1 ❖ SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Busy Override With Busy Override users can initiate a message without waiting for everyone in their talkgroup to become available. Designed for non-emergency situations, Busy Override is one more way to reduce waiting time and maintain a reliable level of communications necessary for public safety agencies. Busy override provides you enhanced flexibility with the choice of: (1) waiting for all your talkgroup members to be included in the radio call or(2) overriding that busy indication and communicating with users located at sites with available channels. Preferred Site Assignment A SmartZone system can also be configured with Preferred Site Assignment operation. This RightSite feature allows radio users to maintain conversations on sites especially useful to operations and group requirements. In areas with overlapping coverage, radios will work on their preferred site in order to efficiently utilize channel resources while minimizing the number of channels necessary to complete a talkgroup call. Four types of preference can be programmed into the radio personality: 1) Always Preferred-The subscriber unit will always use this site if it has at least an acceptable signal strength, even if the site enters site trunking mode; 2) Preferred-The subscriber unit will use this site if it has at least an acceptable signal strength rating and is in wide area trunking mode; 3) No Preferred Site-This is the default setting for subscriber radios. The subscriber unit will use the best signal according to the best RSSI, as previously discussed; and 4) Least Preferred-The subscriber unit will avoid this site unless no other sites with least acceptable signal strength are available for use. SmartZone, through the use of Preferred Site Assignment, provides greater system efficiency by better managing channel loading. Variable Density Sites One of the most important cost saving advantages of the SmartZone system is the ability to support sites with varying numbers of channels. Now, with the SmartZone wide-area network, you can configure your system to meet your capacity requirements at each site. CM)MOTOROLA Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 1 4 28 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 1 ❖ SYSTEM DESCRIPTION For example, in a populated area there may be a need for a large number of channels because there are a large number of users. However, in the rural areas, there may be a smaller number of users and a need for a correspondingly small number of channels. rr d'1 'lrr_ G0 II: lvm it lirr Itil it 1 w}r,'r-0 Pa ,ii■ rr 4 High Density 'I. v Trunking Simulcast Trunkinc .µ . _ Low Density Trunking Figure 9: SmartZone Saves Site Costs: Each site can be configured to meet the communication needs of the area it serves. SmartZone automatically provides communications to the necessary sites in the system. In addition to configuring your system to meet your capacity needs, there are many advantages to Variable Density Sites. The most obvious is reduced hardware costs. By only placing the number of channels at a site that are needed for user capacity in that area, hardware costs are reduced. This translates to fewer repeaters, antennas, combiners/multicouplers, etc. Second, there will be lower site costs. Fewer pieces of equipment will take up less room, require less power and will reduce tower space. Finally with fewer channels at surrounding sites, the system will use a lower number of microwave channels or leased lines. Variable Density Sites provide a cost effective method of system design. You only need to buy the number of resources you need at any one site. With SmartZone there is a cost saving advantage because sites with lower numbers of users can have smaller number of channels. OMOTOROLA Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 1 • 29 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 1 ❖ SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 1.4.3.5 SmartZone's Key Features ❖ Uninterrupted Communications — SmartZone simplifies radio operation by offering transparent roaming and uninterrupted communications throughout the entire system. Users are constantly in contact with dispatchers as they drive throughout the service area. •S Reliable, High Audio Quality—In addition to your communications being continuous, it is also important that they be understandable. SmartZone's unique method of selecting the best radio path for communications assures that messages get through the first time saving time and possibly lives. •3 Exceptional Reliability—A large communication system can be a lifeline to your users. There is no tolerance for the system failure. With SmartZone, system reliability is greatly increased by using fault tolerant components. The SmartZone system can withstand multiple failures and still provide full- featured, APCO-lo compliant trunked communications. ❖ Maximum Resource Efficiency—You want to get the most for your money from your communications system. SmartZone has several features which use the system resources in the most effective manner. This allows more communications to take place on the system. In addition,personnel resources are also very important and SmartZone has several features to maximize the effectiveness of your people while on the job. •I• Full Operations Support— SmartZone can fully support any size of agency or operation. The capacity levels are unmatched and provide for easy expansion as your operations change and grow. ❖ System Approach Provides Single Network—SmartZone's architecture is a true system approach, not a collection of boxes simply linked together. You can think of the architecture as the radio equivalent of a computer Wide Area Network (WAN). Motorola accounted for not only current, but also future features in the development of this system. This provides a single integrated network that is simple to use and will expand as your needs change in the future. Without this design approach, systems become a cumbersome patchwork of existing technologies that may not allow for future capabilities. C)MOTOROLA Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 1 d• 30 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 1 ❖SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ❖ SmartZone Surpasses APCO-16—The Association of Public Safety Communications Radio users (APCO) developed standards for use when public safety officials were choosing a trunked communications system. These standards, APCO Project 16, were established in 1979. Motorola developed the first APCO-16 compliant trunked system, SMARTNET, in 1984. Since that time, Motorola has installed these systems worldwide. Now with the next generation of trunking technology, SmartZone, Motorola exceeds the standard. Section Feature SmartZone §2.6.13 Priority Levels Exceeds §2.6.25 PTT ID Display Exceeds §2.6.14 Emergency Access Meets §2.6.9 Fast Access Times Meets §3.4.6 Selective Radio Inhibit Meets §3.4.6 Dynamic Regrouping Meets Figure 10: SmartZone Exceeds APCO-16 Guidelines: The SmartZone network is fully compliant with all APCO-16 requirements Motorola designed SmartZone with the capacity and the technology to support your current and future requirements. ❖ Capacity—SmartZone's flexibility allows you to make growth decisions later on. Since expansion has been built into the system today, you can save money as the system grows in the future. In accordance with the needs of the County, the SmartZone Controller has been sized to accommodate the number of sites and subscribers and provide for substantial growth. The controller proposed for use by the County provides up to 4000 talkgroups and 48,000 individual radios to be used in the system. The Zone Controller proposed to the County can accommodate up to 48 different radio cells. Each of these cells can have a variable number of channels with a maximum of up to 28 total per site in a trunked configuration. If the need for site expansion arose, this could be accomplished on a channel by channel basis for the simulcast IntelliRepeater cells. Entire sites could also be added to the network. ©MOTOROLA Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 1 •: 31 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 1 ❖ SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ❖ Unrestricted Fleetmap—Motorola's SmartZone system can support up to 48,000 individual users in the network. It can also support up to 4,000 talkgroups. The arrangement or organization of these groups is called the fleetmap. SmartZone provides the most flexible fleetmap available. The fleetmap has no restrictions, so that the communication system can be designed to meet your needs and can be easily changed to incorporate radios in the future. When Motorola delivered the first APCO-16 compliant trunking system over a decade ago, fleetmapping was quite different than it is today. The outdated style requires the user to "fit" its communications groups into a predefined fleetmap at the time the system is set-up. This means that users must "see into the future" to determine what growth and changes will take place in their system. If the changes deviate from the original plan, entire groups of radios may need to be reprogrammed and users may need to learn a new method of operating. Systems Using Outdated Motorola SmartZone Fleetmap Structure Agencies Fleets Subfleets Per Per Per System Agency Fleet 48,000 IDs 2 32 32 4,000 Talkgroups 2 16 64 NO RESTRICTIONS! 2 8 132 2 4 256 2 2 512 8 8 32 8 128 2 8 2 128 16 16 8 9 Figure 11: Fleetmapping Flexibility: SmartZone offers complete flexibility. The system has no restrictions so it can be configured to meet your needs. Systems with restrictions may force you to change your communications needs to meet the system's capabilities. SmartZone fleetmapping has no boundaries. It has no restrictions for the number of individuals in a talkgroup, etc. SmartZone fleetmapping allows you to match your current operation exactly. Flexibility is unrestricted, allowing the SmartZone system to conform to the operational needs you have today, as well as any additions or changes you have in the future. )MOTOROLA Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 1 •: 32 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 1 ❖SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ❖ Transparent Expansion — Even after you have determined the fleetmapping structure and programmed the system, you are still able to make additions without having to reprogram the existing radios. Whether new talkgroups are formed, or new users need to be added to existing talkgroups, they can easily be added without the need to reprogram any existing radios. This type of technology is what you can expect from Motorola. You can be confident that this leadership in technology will be there for the County in the future. 1.5 SYSTEM AND NETWORK MANAGEMENT 1.5.1 Overview An increasingly important aspect of system management is called Network Management. Network Management monitors and controls the infrastructure, devices, ancillary components, and traffic information of a two-way radio system. The importance of Network Management continues to grow as the scope of the range of the systems we provide to our customers' increases. Our customers continue to tell us that managing the security, health, configuration, and performance of their wide-area radio systems is becoming critical to the success of their operations. Maintaining the overall integrity and health of a system through Network Management is critical, because so many users heavily depend upon radio communications as an ever-present and ever functioning tool to keep them working efficiently and safely. Motorola has designed its system management products to provide technicians with the best information possible to assist them in maintaining the system. The SmartZone Manger is a computer-based product that collects and controls information about the SmartZone radio system, and, in so doing, provides a very high level of system and network management capability. The SmartZone Manager meets the management demands of our customers' challenging operating environments in at least six important areas: 1. Information Access and Security First, an integrated database serves as the central collection point for information on the zone controller, audio switch, repeaters, centralized interconnect, and site controllers, as well as for characteristics of the portable and mobile radios. The network manager inputs and accesses all of this information from the same tool. Because most SmartZone systems are utilized by multiple agencies, departments, and ®MOTOROLA Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 1 C. 33 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 1 ❖ SYSTEM DESCRIPTION user groups, the network manager is given the ability to segment the user database in several ways. These include by region(geographically for service personnel), by agency or department, by application, and/or by user type (such as supervisors). This segmentation provides authorized access by various operating groups to critical information, while at the same time providing privacy for confidential information. 2. Comprehensive Fault Management Second, comprehensive fault management and extensive diagnostic monitoring capability provides real-time monitoring of the condition of every infrastructure component in the system. Any faults within infrastructure components such as the controller, the Audio Switch, or the repeaters are reported on a real time basis to the System Manager. At the same time, action is automatically taken to either self-heal the fault or take the faulty component out of the system. In addition to the SmartZone controller, each IntelliRepeater contains a host of diagnostic functions within its firmware. By making this diagnostic information available at a central location when equipment problems occur, the network manager can pinpoint a difficulty more precisely before dispatching service personnel to a site. The component, not just the site, causing the problem is identified which provides a more efficient correction. The technician knows before going to the site which component needs repair. This information allows quicker and more accurate identification of trouble spots, faster servicing, and less down-time. 3. Ease of Use through Graphical Displays Third, graphical displays capture and summarize a significant amount of textual information in pictorial representations on the screen. Because there are so many components to monitor and control in a wide-area system, a large amount of data is available. Network Managers view this complex information more quickly, more easily, and with less confusion, thus allowing them to work more efficiently. The SmartZone Manager's capability has been enhanced by the use of X-terminals. These flexible computer terminals provide greater functionality to the user with options that include the following: ❖ Windows Capability--Displays multiple application screens at the same time. This allows users to reference information form one screen of an application while entering information on a second screen. For example, a customer can have the dispatcher screen and the help screen for dispatcher functions displayed at the same time. M MOTOROLA Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 1 ❖ 34 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 1 ❖SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ❖ Simultaneous Access to Multiple Applications—This allows the user to run two or more different programs at the same time. For example, dispatch functions, manager functions, and configuration functions. This saves the user time from quitting one application before being able to access another. • Managed Network Mode—Allows all terminals to use the same standard protocol (Simple Network Management Protocol, or SNMP). This allows customers to manage terminals much the same way that radio's capabilities are managed. 4. Configuration Simplicity Fourth, the integrated database approach allows for configuration simplicity and flexibility. Equipment parameter values for all infrastructure components are entered or changed once rather than multiple times. A cloning feature allows network managers to program similar components in a fraction of the time it would take otherwise. Because the database separates radio device specifications (such as ID number, serial number, etc.) from user access privileges, network managers can quickly change the matching of sets of radios and sets of radio users. This speeds and simplifies reconfiguration, for example on radio user shift changes. 5. Future Management Flexibility Fifth, the SmartZone Manager uses an industry-standard communications protocol. Use of such a protocol provides future Network Management flexibility that will allow the SmartZone Manager to be integrated with other, third-party Network Management tools. An example of such a tool is an even higher level manager or MOM (Managers of Managers) through which a customer could control both his radio system (via connection to the SmartZone Manager) and his computer system. Using standard protocols also allows for integration of other vendors software tools into the SmartZone Manager product itself. Such integration allows us to continually enhance the capabilities of the SmartZone Manager more quickly for our customers. 6. Resource Tracking Sixth, resources can be tracked through statistical and billing reports. Via collection and formatting of air traffic information, network managers can monitor activity, allocate usage, and execute resource plans for both infrastructure usage and personnel scheduling. Both equipment and personnel resources are used most efficiently. Again, as the scope of systems and their use increases dramatically, it becomes ever more important to track resources in a precise yet flexible manner. F&Morowoua Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 1 ❖ 35 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 1 ❖SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Of course, the SmartZone Manager also includes traditional SMARTNET dispatch functions such as PTT ID and Emergency display, Call Alert, Selective Inhibit, and Dynamic Regrouping. The SmartZone Manager's capabilities clearly surpass competitive offerings in the areas of information security, comprehensive fault management, and future flexibility through industry standard protocols. Competitive systems offer a few levels of password protection. The SmartZone Manager provides true security management via virtually limitless segmentation of the centralized database. The Network Manager can configure database privacy any way that the customer chooses without sacrificing information access. Competitive systems display very basic diagnostics. The SmartZone Manger helps to control the health of the system via comprehensive fault management that monitors and diagnoses the condition of every infrastructure component. Competitive systems use a software platform that is outdated, inflexible, and confining. The SmartZone Manager is engaged with an industry-standard protocol that allows for continual and fluid product enhancement into the future. The SmartZone Manager clearly leads the market in providing trunking Network Management capability that meets and exceeds the demanding requirements of our customers' operating environments. 1.5.2 SmartZone Manager The Phase I ASTRO SmartZone system will be controlled by a computer local area network(LAN), also called the SmartZone Manager. The SmartZone Manager provides a single database location for all system control and management functions. Multiple system databases do not have to be created and maintained. The SmartZone Manager can be easily shared by many users (up to 32), both locally and remotely. The SmartZone Manager is an Ethernet LAN that interconnects several devices including; Zone Controller, Database Server, User/Session Server(s), and local and remote User Terminals. With an Ethernet LAN, it is very easy to add additional user terminals as the system expands. 1.5.3 Hardware Configuration The SmartZone Manager is a LAN-based product that is connected directly to 1:he Zone Controller. Also connected to the LAN are the Database Server, User/Session Server(s), and local and remote user terminals. All devices share the same database, eliminating the need for a variety of databases to build and maintain. The existing Database Server will be used with the expanded system. The SmartZone system database resides on the Database Server, but a copy is exported to the Zone Controller daily in the unlikely event that the link between the Database Server and Zone Controller should fail. C)MoroaoLA Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 1 ❖ 36 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 1 ❖SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The User/Session Server is a UNIX based computer that add software and hardware to provide 1 to 32 User/Session Interfaces. The User Server is connected to the Zone Controller via the Ethernet LAN. (The number of"Users"refers to terminals while the number of"Sessions"refers to software application programs that are operating on the terminals.) The SmartZone Manager system can have a maximum of 32 User Terminals, with at least one required for minimum operation. User Terminals A User Terminal is a terminal that provides a user interface to the SmartZone Manager applications and database. There are different User Terminals for local verses remote locations. User Terminals are available in 17", and 20" monitor sizes. 1.5.3.1 Software Configuration The SmartZone Manager software functions are divided into six major Network Management categories. These are: ❖ System Configuration Management ❖ Fault Management ❖ System Performance ❖ System Accounting •S Security Management ❖ Radio Dispatch Management Each of these categories has many capabilities and features that help manage a large and complex communications system. 1. Configuration Management Configuration Management pertains to the ability to specify the operational parameters of logical and physical devices used within the system. It involves establishing each component in the system, its relationship to other components and the associated parameters of the component. Examples of such devices include sites, talkgroups, repeaters, site controllers, radio profiles, and radio user profiles. The SmartZone Manager includes a single point of entry for configuring most all infrastructure devices in the system. There is a significant amount of information to be entered to properly configure the system and radios. The entry of this information is greatly simplified by use of default settings for many parameters and the ability to clone one set of information, make minor changes to that set of information, and enter the modified, cloned information without entering data in each and every field. M°MOTOROLA Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 1 C. 37 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 1 ❖ SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Configuration Management for the SmartZone Manager can be divided into three umbrella categories: (1) Subscriber Management, (2) Infrastructure Management, and (3) Local Area Network Management. 1) Subscriber Management—Deals with radios, radio users, talkgroups and multigroups, and their relationships to each other. • Radio Management Defines the parameters of a physical radio. The parameters of a radio are serial number, radio ID, SmartZone capable or not, frequency band, interconnect capable and half or full duplex interconnect mode. • Radio User Management—Defines the capabilities and access privileges granted to a specific individual. Radio User parameters are divided into three areas of call access privileges, interconnect configuration, and site access privileges. • Talkgroup Management Talkgroup parameters are group type, group alias, group ID, multigroup alias, group enabled, PTT ID enabled, busy override enabled, and many others. • Status/Message Management Allows up to 50 status sets of aliases and 50 message sets of aliases to be created, modified, and assigned to radio users. 2) Infrastructure Management—Deals with the configuration of the major infrastructure components in a SmartZone system including the Zone Controller, repeaters, and audio switches. )MOTOROLA Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 1 + 38 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 1 4•SYSTEM DESCRIPTION • Zone Management/Zone Controller Management—Configures the Zone Controller operating and physical parameters. Zone Controller operating parameters include call time-outs, extended hang times, and maximum call duration times. • Site Management Manages configuration information for sites, site controllers, repeaters, and their relationships. • Audio Switch Management—Configure the Audio Switch. Parameters include switch alias, switch ID, multiplexer alias, multiplex ID, and multiplexer type. • Miscellaneous--Includes configuration of links, level of service, ports, and DIUs. 3) Local Area Network Management—Allows for the specification of some basic parameters for user servers, user terminals, and printers. 2. Fault Management Fault management pertains to the capability to: monitor the status and status history of a system; display fault information for a system; and perform diagnostics upon the system. It provides an overall picture of the health of the SmartZone system. Fault Management for the SmartZone Manager can be divided into six categories: (1) Current Alarms/Alerts, (2) System Health, (3) Technician Messages, (4) Diagnostics, (5) system Capabilities, and (6) Alert Notes. 1) Current Alerts/Alarms—Provides the user with a way to view the current alerts and alarms in the system. Alerts are generated when a device changes state. Alarms are generated when an out-of-service threshold is reached for a group of devices. 2) System Health--Provides the user with alarm histories for devices, alert histories for devices, and Technician message histories for devices. 3) Technician Messages Displays brief text messages that convey information on call processing problems that may arise in the SmartZone system. 4) Diagnostics—Provides the user with a method to disable a device that is failing, enable devices that have been repaired, and/or set certain select devices to various operational states. 5) System Capabilities—Allows a user to view whether or not a device is capable of performing certain functions. The user will also be able to change a device's capabilities. °MOTOROLA Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 1 •: 39 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 1 ❖SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 6) Alert Notes—Provides a user the capability to enter notes for some, but not all, Alert indications. The purpose of these notes is to display for a technician or system manager additional information that may aid in troubleshooting and/or diagnosis of problems. 3. Performance Management Performance Management pertains to monitoring, controlling, and optimizing the utilization of system resources. Basic Static's Site Summary, Channel Summary, and the Zone Summary reports contribute to a system manager's understanding of how the SmartZone infrastructure resources are being utilized, thus allowing for informed decisions on how new or existing infrastructure resources can be deployed in the future. The ZoneWatch application provides a display of infrastructure resource utilization in real-time. 4. Account Management As a computer based product that collects information, the SmartZone Manager can generate statistical reports as well as export this data through an external port for generation of custom reports. The SmartZone system manager also provides an external port for interfacing to CAD systems. As part of the standard SmartZone system, four basic summary reports are available. Each report is a standard, pre-formatted report that summarizes traffic activity during a selected time period. The selected time period can range from 15 minutes to 24 hours in 15 minute increments and can be set independently for each of the four reports. These traffic reports are automatically generated at the end of the selected time period. A sample of some of the reports available are as follows: Zone Summary Reports ❖ Talkgroup call duration • Talkgroup call count ❖ Talkgroup call busies duration ❖ Talkgroup call busies count ❖ Private Call duration • Private Call Count ❖ Private Call busies duration CAM Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 1 C. 40 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 1 ❖ SYSTEM DESCRIPTION • Private Call busies count ❖ Emergency Call duration ❖ Emergency Call count ❖ % Usage Site Summary Reports ❖ Talkgroup call duration ❖ Talkgroup call count ❖ Talkgroup call busies duration ❖ Talkgroup call busies count ❖ Private Call duration ❖ Private Call busies duration ❖ Private Call busies count ❖ Emergency Call duration ❖ Emergency Call count Talkgroup Summary Reports ❖ Talkgroup call duration ❖ Talkgroup call count ❖ Emergency Call duration ❖ Emergency Call count • Busied calls duration ❖ Busied calls count ❖ Average call duration ❖ %Usage Radio Summary Reports ❖ Talkgroup call duration ❖ Talkgroup call count ❖ Talkgroup call busies duration ❖ Talkgroup call busies count MOMOTOROLA Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 1 :• 41 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 1 ❖SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ❖ Private Call duration ❖ Private Call Count ❖ Private Call busies duration ❖ Private Call busies count 5. Security Management Security Management pertains to providing access to and privacy of information contained in the management database of the SmartZone system. It provides user access control to the SmartZone Manager. There is a Super Manager account that is responsible for establishing other manager accounts and profiles. Security management provides for the creation of manger log-on names and passwords. In the standard SmartZone Manager, every manager will have access to all manager functions except security management. The existing security Partitioning feature allows the Super manager to segment access by other manager accounts to the database in a variety of ways. 6. Radio Dispatch Management Unique to radio systems, Radio Dispatch Management provides the ability to assign access to various dispatch commands (such as Call Alert, Selective Radio Inhibit, etc.), as well as assign access to view radio traffic information for various talkgroups. Radio Dispatch Management provides the following monitoring functions: •I• PTT ID display with alias ❖ Emergency ID display with alias ❖ Radio Check (allows user to verify if radio is active) ❖ Snapshot (displays current information about a radio -- serial number, current talkgroup, current site, and regroup/inhibit/selector lock states) ❖ Change Me (request sent by radio to change talkgroup) ❖ Radio Dispatch Management provides the following control functions: ❖ Call Alert ❖ Selective Radio Inhibit ❖ Dynamic Regrouping (MDM Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 1 • 42 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 1 ❖SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 1.6 MIGRATION AND EXPANDABILITY Motorola has always designed systems and the components that make up a system with expandability and future migration in mind. In the past, it has been difficult to upgrade a system without replacing major components. Today, with Motorola's FLASHport capability, many major system upgrades can be handled without replacing hardware. FLASHport provides system owners with the ability to change, expand, and modify their systems without significant hardware obsolescence. Because most of Motorola's ASTRO SmartZone products are FLASHport capable, the County can select only the system features needed today and upgrade them as needs change. Specific products included in the proposal for Weld County that support FLASHport upgrades include: ❖ QUANTAR Stations 4• XTS 3000 Portables •: ASTRO Digital SpectraTM Mobiles and Control Stations + CENTRACOM Gold Elite Consoles In addition to FLASHport upgrades and migration capability, all major system components are expandable. All new Motorola trunking systems can be expanded to 28 channels per site. Therefore, if system loading increases, additional channels can be added to the system if authorized by the FCC. All SmartZone remote sites can be expanded to 28 channels. The "heart"of a Motorola ASTRO SmartZone system is the Zone Controller. The existing Zone Controller for Weld Counties has 16 port expandable to 48, each one licensed separately. A port is an input/output in the Zone Controller. Typically, a site, a telephone interconnect terminal, and a group of Digital Interface Units each use one port. OMoronoLA Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 1 •: 43 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 1 ❖SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 1.7 RELIABILITY The SmartZone trunked radio system used in Phase I was designed with multiple levels of redundancy, so County personnel can rest assured that they will be able to communicate, even if a failure occurs. Reliable communications are crucial in a public safety radio system. To ensure County users have the most reliable system possible, Motorola's ASTRO SmartZone system provides the levels of redundancy described in this section. •• Multiple Channels—One of the advantages of trunking over conventional system designs is the inherent reliability that comes from the availability of multiple channels for various users and groups. Since channels are assigned as needed, and no user or group depends on a single channel for communications, the failure of one channel can go unnoticed by users. If a voice channel fails, the central controller stops using that repeater until it has been repaired. Although the system's capacity is temporarily reduced, most, if not all, of its functionality is retained. ❖ Back-up Control Channels — Since more than one repeater at a site can be used as the control channel, SmartZone sites are extremely reliable. If a control channel repeater fails, the zone controller automatically assigns control channel duty to one of the other eligible repeaters. ❖ Zone Controller--The proposed system includes a fault-tolerant zone controller that can maintain wide-area communications while experiencing a critical computer board failure. In a fault-tolerant zone controller, if one or more unrelated points of failure are detected, back-up hardware automatically keeps the system running as if no failure had occurred. All calls-in-progress and busy queues are maintained. The communications link between the fault-tolerant zone controller and the audio switch is also redundant. If one link fails, the redundant link becomes active. Calls in progress are maintained during the link switchover. d• Ambassador Electronics Bank(AEB)—The Ambassador electronics bank (AEB) can withstand a single point of failure and continue to operate. Portions of the switch may be disabled, but the rest can still function. Critical operations, such as diagnostics, are spread over at least two main processors. Boards can be replaced while the switch is running, allowing continued operation if a board fails. A fully redundant link between the AEB and the zone controller ensures that the zone controller remains in contact with the rest of the system. &Dmoroaoua Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 1 + 44 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 1 ❖ SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ❖ Central Electronics Bank (CEB)—The central electronics bank (CEB)--the heart of the dispatch system--features unequaled reliability through a fault- tolerant design. Rather than depending on a single or redundant microprocessor, Motorola's CEBs use a distributed hardware and microprocessor approach. Each operator position connected to the CEB can run independently. This architecture ensures that a single point of failure does not disrupt service to the entire network. If a failure occurs at one operator position, only that position is affected. This unique console design provides as many levels of redundancy as the number of operator positions. In other systems, a single processor runs the entire console network. If that processor fails, the entire system is out of service. The CEB is capable of self diagnosis and healing, while ensuring fault minimization. The CEB continuously tests microprocessors and audio and data paths automatically. To improve reliability, fault detection occurs on a "majority-rule"decision process, as follows: Multiple processors run multiple diagnostics tests on the system. A majority of the tests must indicate that a component has failed before it is taken off line. Once a fault is detected, the CEB will automatically switch to a back-up piece of hardware or try to re-start the failed component in the case of a momentary hang-up. If the failed component does not restart and does not have a backup, it is partitioned away from the rest of the system, while an error message is sent to the affected dispatch position and to a diagnostics terminal for maintenance personnel. This maintains the system's highest possible level of operation. Each console operator position has its own processor board; so, if one fails, all other operator positions continue to function normally. The console electronics have redundant power supplies for an added level of redundancy. Motorola CEBs provide high-performance, trouble-free operation through a reliable, fault-tolerant design. This ensures uninterrupted call processing, which keeps users in touch. + IntelliRepeaters—Motorola IntelliRepeaters are QUANTAR repeaters with enhanced software and processing capabilities. They are used at all remote transmitter sites. For example, any IntelliRepeater can be either a voice channel or a site controller. If an IntelliRepeater acting as a site controller fails, an alternate IntelliRepeater automatically assumes control of the site. Any site that has at least two operational IntelliRepeaters can provide trunking capability with full SmartZone features, if one control channel, one voice channel, the link between them, and the link to the zone controller remain operational. An OM Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 1 ❖ 45 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 1 ❖ SYSTEM DESCRIPTION IntelliRepeater site can also provide site trunking if the link to the zone controller fails. The figure below shows how each IntelliRepeater has controller functionality built in for complete fault tolerance, and how it compares with a dedicated controller approach. 1.7.1 Reliability Features One of the most important system attributes that the County will evaluate will be how the system performs during various failure conditions. Motorola has designed the Weld Counties trunked communications system to be unmatched in terms of reliability, and ability to provide continued communications should such failures occur. Failure mode testing of the system will be witnessed by Weld County prior to the system leaving the Motorola staging factory. The following is a comprehensive analysis of the infrastructure failure scenarios. Of equal importance, especially in multi-site, wide area networks, is the operation of radio units during failure scenarios. In a multi-site network, the potential exists for a site(s) to be in "site trunking," or standalone mode, while all other sites remain in the "wide-area,"or normal operating mode. How radio units respond to a site that has entered"site trunking" is very important. All of the ASTRO Spectra mobiles and XTS 3000TM portables proposed for the County incorporate specialized software algorithms that allow you to decide how the radio unit should respond, whether to: ❖ Remain locked on the site, even though it is in the"site trunking" mode ❖ Move to another site that is in the wide-area mode ❖ Move to another site that is in the wide-area mode, only if the current site is in failsoft The following sections contain an analysis of the infrastructure failure scenarios. A generic system configuration is also used for illustration purposes. (M7jMoronoz.a Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 1 •: 46 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 1 ❖ SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 1.7.1.1 Failure: SmartZone Controller SIMULCAST SITE AUDIO =E .NSr REMOTE � _ H LLJ BANKS `CONTROLLER `L LBANKS OMULCAST W I DISPATCH CENTER - 1 SIMULCAST PRIME ELECTRONICS �CN SL Disv I w CONTROLLER CONTROLLER BANK �- -- e --- INTELLIREPEATER T.I CHANNEL — NKS q IL DISPATCH CENTER _ RNs, 11 CHANNEL DISPLAY I DISPLAY i YANKS l INTELLIREPEATER [aN5r — — CHANNEL f Figure 12: SmartZone Controller Failure The fault tolerant SmartZone Controller is designed to withstand multiple, unrelated points of failure and continue to provide call processing service as if nothing had failed. All calls in progress and busy queues will be maintained. This is accomplished by providing redundant hardware for all call processing boards, hard disk drives, and power supplies. If power to the SmartZone Controller is lost, each available site in the system will revert to "site trunking." trunked mode. Dispatchers will be able to communicate with the radio users via fallback control stations at the dispatch sites Protection: Fault Tolerant SmartZone Controller, Spare Controller boards, Uninterruptible Power Supply/Generator Detection: Alarm on SmartZone Manager Terminal, Alarm on MOSCAD Alarm Subsystem °MOTOROLA Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 1 C. 47 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 1 ❖ SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 1.7.1.2 Failure: Audio Switch (Ambassador Electronics Bank) SIMULCAST SITE r r r S RRONL CHANNEL I CHANNEL ca 1 1 • • • LOXLROLIEp 5 BANXS BANR5 1 CONIROLLLp R LR11lR J H DISPATCH CENTER 1 PRIME PRIME CONSOLE IB XNEL Cs-PLAY [DISPLAY srr IC SIMULCAST SIMULCAST ELECTRONICS ""XJ L CONTROLLER CONTROLLER BANK —. __-- R —._ — 1NTELLIREPEATER — cRAANNiEL T H--�T .. BANRS p J'up DISPATCH CENTER____ rum 1 DISPLAY INTELLIREPEATER T.5.W✓i,Ii R E P Figure 13: Audio Switch Failure The Audio Switch has multiple T1/E1 interface modules. The failure of a T1/E1 interface module in the Audio Switch would result in the loss of wide-area audio paths associated with the failed module. Since all interface modules have independent processors, all other interface modules operate normally and remain unaffected. Protection: Spare interface modules (optional), independent processors, audio circuit cross-connecting. Detection: Alarm on SmartZone Manager Terminal, Alarm on MOSCAD Alarm Subsystem Q9MOTOROLA Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 1 •:• 48 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 1 ❖ SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 1.7.1.3 Failure: SmartZone Controller to Audio Switch Interface SIMULCAST SITE 1.NSL_ REMOTE LCOX1SOMEONE WITC_ T'XS. lI <NINNEL SIMULCAST T T uu pOLLER tiWITCN CHANNEL p>XKs cox-mount p r_ 9ANF5 J _ p R I DISPATCH CENTERToN PRIME _ PRIME r CONSOLE NA_NEL I OISPLn IID LAY CONTROLLER T CONTROLLER L ELE BAxS _ _ LLllll 0 — INTELLIREPEATER DINES T r BANES R R DISPATCH CENTER _ TRNSr —CHANNEL DISPLAY DISPLAY HANKS INTELLIREPEATER _ i-Nsr_ r 111 Cf'IANN(L Ipl _p _ BANKS l ] Figure 14: SmartZone to Audio Switch Link Failure The links and interface modules between the SmartZone Controller and the Audio Switch (Motorola's Ambassador Electronics Bank, AEB) are redundant. Failure of one link or module will result in automatic switchover to the redundant link or module. The entire system remains in the wide-area trunking mode. Protection: Redundant links and interface modules, Spare AEB boards (optional) Detection: Alarm on SmartZone Manager Terminal, Alarm on MOSCAD Alarm Subsystem OMorono&4 Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 1 C. 49 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 1 ❖SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 1.7.1.4 Failure: Console Electronics Bank (CEB)—Dispatch Interface SIMULCAST SITE, vEXmE rr1{ gig= UOm Cx<MxEL CHANNEL CONTROLLER T Ll , CONEROLLFp BANKS COXIpOLLEX p p p1 • B1NK_ swxcx DISPATCH CENTER _ _ TANS. RPM'S PRIME CONSOLE AEA HOISPLAY OR � Pur l SIMULCAST SIMULCAST ELECTRONICS 1 B1NKS. CONTROLLER CONTROLLER BANK A - INTELLIREPEATER TENS. —— — CHANNEL BANKS R R R DISPATCH CENTER _ reNS. 1 1 CHANNEL) i�DISPLAYI DISPLAY BANKS J INTELLIREPEATER _ EAST— -- NN CHANNEL T I BANKS A Figure 15: CEB to Dispatch Interface Failure The failure of one (or more) dispatch operator interface modules in the Console Electronics Bank(CEB) would result in that dispatcher operating the system via fallback control stations at the dispatch sites (included with this proposal). Since all interface modules have independent processors, all other dispatch terminals operate normally and remain unaffected. The entire system remains in the wide-area trunking mode. Protection: Spare interface modules (optional), independent processors, multiple load-sharing power supplies, control stations connected to console (optional) Detection: Console user detection, Alarm on SmartZone Manager Terminal, Console Diagnostics CteMOTOROLA Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 1 •:• 50 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 1 ❖ SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 1.7.1.5 Failure: Console Electronics Bank (CEB)—Audio Switch Interface SIMULCAST SITE l r .HSr HANSE REMOTE SNApiZONE AUDIO 1 CHANNEL SOINipOCA5T SMARTZOEp SWITCH r C BANKS BAxMS LLCp p p _� I I X [ DISPATCH CENTER___ PpmE PRIME CONSOLE HANNE DISP� DISPLAY CONTROLLERCONTROLLER DANK A D INTELLIREPEATER NEL FRF 0 TR DISPATCH CENTER TeNSr CHANNEL DISPLAY I DISPLAY] rIIIJII'_BANKS J I INTELLIREPEATER TeNSr CMIWNEL ; u—T BANNS R R Figure 16:CEB to Audio Switch Link Failure The links between the Console Electronics and the Audio Switch are redundant. Failure of one link will result in automatic switchover to the redundant link.. The entire system remains in the wide-area trunking mode. Protection: Redundant links and interface modules, Spare AEB interface modules (optional), Spare CEB interface modules (optional) Detection: Alarm on SmartZone Manager Terminal, Console diagnostics °MOTOROLA Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 1 :• 51 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 1 ❖SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 1.7.1.6 Failure: TeNSr Channel Bank SIMULCAST SITE fl OLLER SWITCH M�"D. cN�MMCL sluu�LOLLE r CONTROLLER JJ 7775 li[1l__ CHA NEL /�ANx5EL CONTROLLER p p — DISPATCH CENTER -_- PRINC PRIME Co DOLE CB= NNE DrsPur LI SPUYI SIMULCAST CONTROLLER ELECTRONICS Cs O RES CONTROLLER CONIgDLLER II BANK J " e INTELLIREPEATER TANS. K R� P cRANxa BPxxS DISPATCH CENTER CHANNEL r DISPLAY I DISPLAY BANKS INTELLIREPEATER CANS, i i � P Figure 17: TeNSr Channel Bank Failure All TeNSr channel banks are modular and include TI cards, voice cards, CPU cards, and others. For all channel banks at the Master Site, all T1 cards, all CPU cards, and all Power Supplies are redundant. Failure of one of these cards will result in automatic switchover to the redundant card. This level of redundancy far exceeds that required by the Request for Proposal, and will provide a system reliability unmatched by any other vendor. Failure of a critical card at an IntelliRepeater site will result in that site entering site trunking. Protection: Multiple TeNSr channel banks, Redundant modules, spare modules (optional) Detection: Alarm on SmartZone Manager Terminal, Alarm on MOSCAD Alarm Subsystem M waorowos.Aa Attachment B 3/13/2000 Section 1 • 52 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 1 ❖ SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 1.7.1.7 Failure: Dispatch Terminal SIMULCAST SITE _ f CONTROLLER - SYMCH J CHANNEL L L BANKS CONTROLLER R R R • • LJ I DISPATCHNS �m Y CENTER CHANNEL DISPLAY SIMULCAST SIMULCAST ELEBIRONICS BANKS CONTROLLER CONTROLLER ANA A --- — B — INTELLIREPEATER CHANNEL T r T BANKS R R R DISPATCH CENTER TeNOr IrrI CHANNEL [NS PEAT :H1 1M INTELLIREPEATER NY CHANNEL Rl p R flMM$ J Figure 18: Dispatch Terminal Failure The failure of a Dispatch Terminal would result in that dispatcher operating the system via fallback control stations at the dispatch sites (included with this proposal). All other dispatch terminals operate normally and remain unaffected. The entire system remains in the wide-area tnmking mode. Protection: Fallback control station (optional), Spare Console Interface Enclosure (optional) Detection: Console user detection, Alarm on SmartZone Manager Terminal, Console Diagnostics °MOTOROLA Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 1 C. 53 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 1 ❖ SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 1.7.1.8 Failure: IntelliRepeater SIMULCAST SITESMA ONT RLLE —J LBRNKSL CRINRS NTH'NEL CONTROLLEiR [�CONTROLLER SWILCN -__ I I I DISPATCH CENTER PRIME vFwr CONSOLE 1 CHrI EL {{DISPLAY oI SPLAY I SIMULCAST SIMULCAST ELECTRONICS BANKS I CONTROLLER CONTROLLER HANK N -- INTELLIREPEATER_ TANNE 1 RE T �I 11 CHANNEL B4HKS p p J Ik 1I ER DISPATCH CENTER_ __ CHANNEL 'DISPLAY DISPLAY 111 ANTE LLIREPEATER_ TEEN$L CHANNEL i_ T_ BANKS 3 Figure 19: IntelliRepeater Failure The traffic capacity would be reduced at the affected site. The site will retain all SmartZone trunking features as long as at least one voice channel and one control channel remain operational. IntelliRepeaters operate at the remote trunking sites without the need for a remote site controller. If the IntelliRepeater controlling the site should fail, another IntelliRepeater will automatically take control of the site, maintaining the same network mode of operation as before the failure, with all SmartZone features retained. Protection: Multiple IntelliRepeaters, multiple potential remote site controllers, spare IntelliRepeaters (optional) Detection: Alarm on SmartZone Manager Terminal, Alarm on MOSCAD Alarm System C)MOTOROLa Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 1 C. 54 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 1 ❖ SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 1.7.1.9 Failure: T1 Link to an IntelliRepeater Site SIMULCAST SITE L SIMREMUTELCAST I IT SMARCZONE 010 ANKS CHANNEL Lu4 j u�,T NNEL CONiROLLCR $WRL� BANKS BANKS CONTROLLER R R R DISPATCH CENTER 1____ T.NS, PRIME PRIME 500501 CHANNEL OISPLAY, DISPLAY SIMULCAST SIMULCAST ELECTRONICS BANKS CONTROLLER CONTROLLER BANK - - INTELLIREPEATER __ 1•NSA - T� ._.__. CHANNEL 1 I BANKS R R B DISPATCH CENTER CHPNNEL OISPu' OISPLA BANKS INTELLIREP EATER TANS ��.._�. CHANNEL 2 i T BANKS R Figure 20: Link to IntelliRepeater Failure A T1 link failure to an IntelliRepeater site would result in the affected site entering site trunking. The site would continue to trunk calls normally, without routing the calls wide-area. All other sites would operate normally and remain unaffected. Protection: Site trunking, redundant site links (optional) Detection: Alarm on SmartZone Manager Terminal, Alarm on MOSCAD Alarm System 1.8 EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION 1.8.1 Master Site The Master Site houses all of the "prime"equipment for the SmartZone. The majority of the equipment located here is in place and will be expanded as necessary. Major equipment items that are housed here include: ❖ SmartZone Fault-Tolerant Controller d• Zone Controller Database Server ❖ Zone Controller User Servers + Local System Manager Terminals • Line Printer OMOTOROLA Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 1 ❖ 55 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 1 ❖ SYSTEM DESCRIPTION • Ambassador Electronics Bank/Audio Switch SmartZone ❖ TeNSr Channel Banks ❖ Digital Interface Units (DIU) ❖ MOSCAD Alarm Master with Front End Processor 1.8.1.1 Zone Controller The existing SmartZone Fault-Tolerant Controller is the heart of the entire system. The Zone Controller is based on a multi-processor, fault-tolerant computer platform to provide non-stop trunking call processing for a SmartZone wide-area radio communications system. The Zone Controller computer is of a modular design, allowing field replacement of individual components without interruption of service. The Zone Controller is housed in a 33" high, office environment cabinet. All system activity is managed and controlled by the Zone Controller. 1.8.1.2 SmartZone System and Network Management For system management the Master Site will have several pieces of equipment., including: ❖ Zone Controller Database Server ❖ Zone Controller User Servers ❖ System Manager Terminals ❖ Line Printers These computers are described in detail in the"System and Network Management" Section of the proposal. Basically, these items are connected in an Ethernet LAN configuration to provide the database and system management for the Zone Controller. Various SmartZone Manager software functions and processes are resident on either the Zone Controller, the Database Server, and User Server(s). User Terminals provide access and a view to the various software applications and functions. 1.8.1.3 Ambassador Electronics Bank The Ambassador Electronics Bank (AEB) is a large capacity TDM audio processing switch that is used in SmartZone systems to route the repeater and dispatch audio throughout the system. All the audio processing in a SmartZone system occurs in cards inside the Ambassador Electronics Bank called Ambassador Boards (AMBs). C)Moro10 at Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 1 •: 56 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 1 •S SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The AEB SmartZone site audio routing is controlled by the Zone Controller Ambassador Base Interface or ZAMBI boards. In a SmartZone system, the AEB interfaces and routes audio between Digital Interface Units (DIUs), remote SmartZone sites via Tls and channel banks, console operator positions via Central Electronics Banks (CEBs), and conventional base stations via CEBs and Base Interface Modules (BIMs). All audio interfacing to the AEB is via Tls, created by channel banks, or CEBs. The AEB can process at least 700 audio sources simultaneously depending on the configuration. The AEB card cage has 32 digital audio buses which interface to any combination of CEBs and/or channel banks up to a maximum of 32. These buses carry CEB or channel bank source audio passed up through the AMBs. An AEB can have a maximum of three (3) card cages. Each card cage has slots for 16 boards. The existing Ambassador Electronics Bank for has two (2) card cages. The AEB will also have redundant links to the Zone Controller via ZAMBI links. The existing AEB will have four (4) AMB cards added to allow the interface of the additional sites, consoles and Digital Interface Units (DIUs). 1.8.1.4 TeNSr Channel Banks The Motorola TeNSr(Telecommunications Network Server) is a multifunctional TI/E1 access device used to combine the capabilities of a digital cross-connect, channel bank, multiplexer, DSU/CSU, drop and insert, and Tl to El converter. The TeNSr can support up to eight T 1 s or El s (or any combination totaling eight). Each I'I or El can carrying any combination of high speed dedicated data and voice traffic. Add-on resource cards give the TeNSr the ability to manage ISDN, inverse multiplexing, voice compression, and frame relay. The TeNSr is software configurable with menu driven user interface. It is remotely accessible through a variety of methods and has many integrated diagnostics and alarm reporting functions. In addition to simply providing these site-to-site links, the TeNSr/800 offers complete diagnostic and management capabilities. The software package used to provide this allows a system manager or technician to reach any TeNSr/800 used in this system. When making this connection (via a 2400 BPS link) the user may manage and configure individual TeNSr/800 cards, access alarm reports and histories and backup all essential records. A standard personal computer using VT-100 terminal emulation software, NOT included in Motorola's proposal, displays this information. For the system proposed for the County, the TeNSr Channel Banks will perform several key functions including: ❖ Standard T1 multiplexing OmoronoLA Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 1 • 57 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 1 ❖ SYSTEM DESCRIPTION • Digital cross-connect (DACs) to the AEB ❖ ASTRO and analog voice multiplexing Combining all these capabilities and functions into a single device increases reliability by reducing system complexity, and reducing the number and costs of spare equipment. The Motorola TeNSr/800 model has nine card slots in the front and nine card slots in the back. The first two slots in the front are reserved for the primary and backup CPUs. The next three slots hold the optional resource cards (if any), and the last four slots hold the WAN cards. The power supply is placed behind the front bezel. The first back slot is reserved for the Interface Card. The remaining eight slots can hold any combination of user cards (data, voice, etc.,). There are also five slots available behind the back bezel for up to five (5) optional ringing generators. All TeNSr channel banks at the Master Site will have redundant Cross-Connect CPUs. Each will also support 1XN WAN redundancy. All other cards including the Interface Card, and user cards (voice, data, etc.)will not have, or support,redundancy. The Squaw, Westcreek and Thorodin remote sites will also utilize TeNSr 800 channel banks. These channel banks will have CPU redundancy. The user cards required at Squaw and Westcreek include some or all of the following: ❖ 4-wire T/O Card with 8 ports ❖ Sub Rate Unit(SRU)Data Card with 10 ports At the Master Site there will be two (2) TeNSr/800 Channel Banks added to the existing configuration. These channel banks will be equipped with combinations of 4- wire voice cards, WAN cards, and SRU Cards. The Channel Banks will also be used as DACs for all the incoming/out going Tls in the system. All audio in the system will pass through at least one TeNSr Channel Bank at the Master Site, which is why Motorola has included as much redundancy as technically possible in the Master TeNSr equipment. 1.8.1.5 ASTRO DIU 3000 The ASTRO DIU (Digital Interface Unit) 3000 acts as the gateway between analog dispatch equipment and the ASTRO digital trunking system. Since the console system is analog, the DIU is used to convert the audio from analog to ASTRO digital and visa versa. ,,A)morowoi.a Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 1 • 58 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 1 ❖ SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The ASTRO DIU 3000 is also the device that encrypts or decrypts secure audio to and from the console. The DIU 3000 supports DES-OFB, DES-XL, DVP-XL, and DVI- XL encryption algorithms for operation in the ASTRO digital mode. The DIU encryption cartridge is capable of using either one or(optionally) two of these algorithms. With dual encryption algorithm capability, agencies using different encryption algorithms can interoperate in the secure mode. The DIU 3000 houses the encryption keys for the fixed network, mainly the consoles. The RF infrastructure is transparent to all secure traffic. Up to eight encryption keys stored in the DIU can be selected by a console operator. Encryption keys are used to decode inbound transmissions from subscriber units and to encode outbound calls from a console. Encryption is included in the County proposal. The modular design of the ASTRO DIU 3000 allows it to be packaged in a card cage that is 19" W x 10.5" H x 14" D, and holds up to four(4) DIUs. There will be total of twenty(20) additional DIU 3000s added to the system. Each DIU will be equipped with the following options and capabilities: ❖ Trunking capability ❖ IMBE vocoding 1.8.1.6 CENTRACOM Gold Series Central Electronics Banks CENTRACOM Gold Series Central Electronics Banks (CEBs) will be required at the Denver Transmitter Building. The CEB is essentially an intercommunication's network that allows for integration of dispatch positions and the communications equipment they control. The CEBs provides the console operators the ability to control the SmartZone system and access to other radio systems as necessary. 1.8.1.7 MOSCAD Alarm Master and Alarm Remote The Master Site houses the existing MOSCAD Master Computer for the alarm reporting system. This site also has a MOSCAD Remote Terminal Unit (RT'U) that is similar to the MOSCAD RTUs at all other remote transmitter sites. The GMC is a WindowsTM based PC with a Graphical User Interface (GUI) software package to allow viewing and controlling the entire MOSCAD system. The RTU for the Master Site is interfaced directly to the Master Alarm Computer System via RS-232. It is also connected via RS-232 to the TeNSr Channel Banks. Motorola has proposed MOSCAD system to alarm the sites, Intellirepeaters and Premisys Channel Banks. MOMOTOROLA Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 1 :• 59 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 1 ❖SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 1.8.1.8 QUANTAR IntelliRepeater Stations The IntelliRepeater sites will be equipped with 100 watt QUANTAR IntelliRepeater (IR) stations. The trunking stations will be equipped for ASTRO digital and analog operation, and will be rack mounted. The IntelliRepeater was specifically designed for SmartZone systems. Although an IR site normally receives instructions from the Zone Controller at the Master Site, each IntelliRepeater station is capable of acting as a site controller in case of site trunking. Since each IR station is fully capable of acting as a site controller, the IR site is inherently fault tolerant. Communications between all IntelliRepeaters at a site is through a dedicated LAN. Another feature of an IR site is its ability to use single channel trunking, which is sometimes called voice on control channel. 1.13.1.9 MOSCAD Remote Terminal Unit (RTU) RTU equipment for the IntelliRepeater Sites will be interfaced directly to Master located at the Master Site via a RS-232 port on the TeNSr Channel Bank. It will also be connected via RS-232 to IntelliRepeaters, and the TeNSr Channel Banks. Additionally, sixty(60) external dry contact closure type inputs and sixteen (16) digital outputs will be available at these three sites for other inputs and outputs such as site alarms (building, tower, etc.). Wiring of site alarms and any additional hardware required will be the responsibility of the County. 1.9 SYSTEM ELEMENTS 1.9.1 CENTRACOM Consoles 1.9.1.1 CENTRACOM Elite Series The CENTRACOM Gold Series Elite console equipment will be used at the dispatch center located at 6th and Kipling. The Motorola Gold Series Elite console with graphical user interface (GUI) will provide a user friendly dispatcher environment. The Elite consoles are designed to enhance the dispatch operator's capabilities in performing resource management tasks such as talkgroup selection and also to minimize the effort and concentration required for radio control. Selecting a displayed resource, transmitting over the displayed selected resource(s), or instant transmitting over a displayed resource are performed with only one button press. To minimize operator confusion and the chance of mistakes being made, all resources are referred to by actual names, not numeric references. Cross referencing a number to a resource name is not required when performing a dispatching operation. For maximum flexibility, these names are defined by the user at system installation and are easily changed at any time after system installation. C)MOTOROI.A Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 1 :• 60 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 1 ❖ SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Each operator position is totally customer configurable. This configurability includes everything from alias assignment of resources to what resources are assigned to each operator position, to the screen display of each operator position. The CRT dispatch program follows the Microsoft Windows® screen display and standard. The screen display utilizes Graphical User Interface (GUI) technology. The screen display is designed so that the number of items which appear on the screen at one time are minimized, reducing the potential distractions to operators. However, all radio dispatch functions are operable from one screen display. Operators do not have to access another screen display in order to perform a radio dispatch function or to take a telephone call. As the Operator console position operates in the Windows NT environment other Windows compatible programs such as a word Processor can be run at the same time as the Elite console program. Detailed Equipment Information The following section provides detailed information about the equipment and user interface being proposed. Central Electronic Interface Each operator is connected to the central electronics by a single seven pair plug-in cable. The pairs consist of a data pair to the central electronics package, a data pair from the central electronics package, microphone audio to the central electronics package, select and unselect audio from the central electronics package. The CRT console interfaces to the central electronics via a single console operator interface board. This board contains the circuitry necessary to interface the operator position to the central electronics for both voice and data. The desktop console consists of a CRT monitor, console interface electronics enclosure, CPU, and mouse. The console interface electronics enclosure is designed to be placed on the writing surface or mounted into the console furniture. The CRT monitors are placed on top of the furniture or next to the console interface electronics enclosure. The CPU can be placed either on top or underneath the writing surface. OM MOTOROLA Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 1 C. 61 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 1 ❖SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Console Location The consoles are able to be located up to a maximum distance of 2000 feet (via cable and ground connections) from the central electronics package. If a distance greater than 2000 cable feet is desired, or if an operator is to be remotely located in a different building, a remote interface is used for each remote operator desired. The remote operator interface provides full console control at a remote location. Console features such as full parallel status, selective intercom, console speaker audio, and console diagnostics are standard capabilities of the remote operator interface. The remote operator is connected to the central electronics via the remote operator interface through five standard phone lines (type 3002 unconditioned line) or three duplex microwave channels. Three of the five pairs shall be used for audio (operator's microphone, select, and unselect speaker audio). Operator Position Electronics On the desktop console, all electronics are contained in an electronics enclosure. All electronics boards are easily accessible by removing the top cover of the console interface enclosure. A large transmit button is provided on the front panel of the console interface electronics. This button is large and red in color to allow easy allocation and access for the operator. This button will allow the operator to transmit on the currently selected resource(s). A LED bar-type VU display is provided. The VU display employs red LEDs that respond to microphone audio during transmit and to selected received audio when not transmitting. Two speaker/amplifiers are provided and four speaker/amplifiers are allowed as a standard feature of the console. Both speakers face forward, toward the operator The left-most speaker will reproduce the audio from the resource(s) which have been selected for operation. The right-most speaker shall reproduce the audio from all the other active resources in the console (Unselected). Each speaker amplifier contains a guardtone filter and a volume control. The volume control allows the volume to be reduced to a totally inaudible level. (It shall be possible to defeat this inaudible condition by a simple jumper change.) C®MoronotA Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 1 4 62 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 1 ❖ SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 1.9.1.2 Console Hardware Computer CPU A central processing unit (CPU) is provided at each operator position matching the following minimum specifications: d• Pentium II 233-MHz 4• 2.5-GB HD ❖ 96-MB RAM ❖ 512K CACHE ❖ 24x CD-ROM Drive ❖ 2-MB VRAM ❖ Two Serial Ports, one Parallel Port ❖ Four ISA slots, three PCI slots •3 CD-ROM—SCSI ❖ Ethernet Network ❖ PS/2 mouse port ❖ Two-button mouse ❖ 101-key key board ❖ Microsoft Windows NT 4.0 or better CRT Monitor To minimize any strain on the operator's eyes, a high-resolution CRT color monitor is provided. The monitor screen is a minimum of 20-inch diagonal and shall have a minimum resolution of 800 x 600 pixels. This screen is capable of displaying a minimum of 256 colors. Microphone An adjustable gooseneck microphone is provided. This microphone is mounted on the speaker enclosure, thus eliminating microphone wire clutter on the desktop. An internal condenser microphone is available at all locations. A footswitch is provided for common push to talk activation. Omar-wawa' Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 1 :• 63 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 1 ❖ SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Headset Jack One headset jack is provided which allows the operator to hear select audio via a headset and to allow the operator to respond via a microphone attached to the headset. This jack is compatible with either four- or six-wire headsets. Inserting the headset plug into the headset jack automatically disconnects the console microphone and select speaker and disables the acoustic feedback cross-muting features. The base station transmitters are controlled by the panel-mounted transmit switch or by the headset transmit switch. The operator headset can be used for telephone conversations as well as for radio conversations. A second jack is available for training purposes. Assignable Speaker All speakers are assignable. Any speaker is capable of being assigned to be used as a select, unselect, monitor, or dedicated speaker. Up to 14 total (optional) speakers may be provided per operator position. 1.9.1.3 Console Operations The console operator position is designed to make a dispatcher's job as easy arid stress-free as possible. The screen is designed so that it is not cluttered with indicators which are permanently displayed, whether activity is occurring or not. Console Database Management All console system data is managed from a single point via a console database management program. This database stores and controls all resource data. Resource data shall include all radio resources, telephone resources, auxiliary input and output resources as well as operator aliases. The console database manager allows authorized personnel to create and edit: resources, resource options, and auxiliary control names; resources and functions available at an operator position. Any changes to the system, such as adding or deleting of resources, are done through the console database management terminal once only. Once the modifications have been made from the database, each operator position shall be updated via a single point download from the database terminal. Making modifications to each operator position individually is not acceptable. All resource and alias data are created, managed and edited at a single point via a management terminal. The console database program is able to run from any operator position using the authorized password. t®moroaot a Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 1 ❖ 64 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 1 ❖ SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 1.9.1.4 Local Area Network (LAN) General All dispatch operator positions are linked by a LAN network to allow for single point download of dispatch assignment and configuration information. The system configuration meets the following minimum requirements of a database server connected to multiple client dispatch workstations. Software applications to meet these system functional requirements are run on the same PCs. The configuration of the console system includes Local Operator positions and/or Remote Operator positions connected via Ethernet LAN or through the RAS facilities of Windows NT. For Local Operator positions at the Dispatch Center, the database server and client dispatch workstations are networked using 10BaseT Ethernet connections. This includes an Ethernet card in each operator position and twisted pair connections between each operator position and the network hub(s). Remote Operator Position This configuration makes use of the Remote Access Server(RAS) facilities of Windows NT. This allows the remote dispatch workstation to connect to the network, via modem, through the serial ports of a PC that is connected to the main network. Once the remote PC has logged in using the RAS connection, the remote PC appears and behaves to the user as if it were connected to the network locally using an Ethernet connection. 1.9.1.5 Console Administration A console administration program is provided. This program allows the console manager to perform the following functions: ❖ Create new configurations (to be used by operator or shared) ❖ Password protect configurations ❖ Modify existing configurations ❖ Determine the number of folders on the screen ❖ Determine the number of Patch/MSel folders on the screen C. Determine location of Patch/MSel groups on the screen ❖ Determine height of Patch/MSel groups (e.g., taller if anticipating many members in the groups) MOMOTOROLA Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 1 C• 65 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 1 ❖ SYSTEM DESCRIPTION • Determine if dispatchers will have the ability to assign and de-assign resources during dispatch ❖ Determine if the activity log will be shown initially(could show activity log in Admin and still hide/show it in Dispatch) ❖ Assign/De-assign radio, telephone, and auxiliary input/output resources to various folders AND determine location (location maybe changed in Dispatch by dragging and dropping the resources) 9 Determine where features will be placed on the resources 9 Determine the look of the resource (expanded or condensed) 9 Determine border color for each radio resource • Determine audio routing of resources to speakers 9 Set initial volume level of radio and phone resources ❖ Set ringing tone on phone resources • Determine icons used for auxiliary input/outputs ❖ Name the folders (main); name MSel and Patch Folders ❖ Determine items that should go on the toolbar and where on the toolbar they should go ❖ Save configurations 1.9.1.6 CRT Screen and Screen Interface Device To minimize operator confusion and the chance of mistakes being made, operators will be able to perform all dispatch operations by looking only at the CRT screen. They shall not have to look at both the screen and controls located off of the screen. The screen interface is designed to expose the operators to the minimum number of controls necessary to operate the console efficiently. The dispatch console operates in the Microsoft Windows NT application which allows the operator to access more than one application simultaneously. ®MOTOROLA Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section' 1 d• 66 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 1 ❖ SYSTEM DESCRIPTION In order to minimize any strain on the operator's eyes, a high-resolution color CRT monitor shall be provided. The CRT screen shall be a 20-inch diagonal and shall has a minimum resolution of 800 x 600 pixels. This screen is capable of displaying a minimum of 256 colors. Brightness and contrast adjustments for the CRT screen shall be provided to the operator. Screen Layout The screen layout is in the Windows NT style with Menu Bar, Tool Bar, Icons, etc. System indications and operator commands are in the form of icons which are intuitive to the operators. The screen layout consists of the following major areas: Menu Bar, Tool Bar, Clock, Dispatch Work Area, Patch and Multi-select area, Activity Log area and status area. Menu Bar A Menu Bar is provided and is located at the top of the screen horizontally placed across the screen. These menus are pull-down windows to reveal menu items for selection. The selected item is highlighted and a selection shall be made by choosing the highlighted item. Choosing anywhere outside of the menu window closes that menu window. Tool Bar A Tool Bar, which contains short-cuts to the menu items in the Menu Bar, is represented by graphical icons. The Tool Bar is located as the second line on the screen immediately below the Menu Bar. This Tool Bar is capable of exhibiting up to seven graphical tool icons. These tool icons are intuitive to the user as to what command they represent. Clock A clock is located at the top of the screen to the right side of the Tool Bar. This clock has a time display of Hours:Minutes:Seconds. Either a 12- or 24-hour display are available. The display will be synchronized to the time generator in the CPU which is synchronized with the Server; therefore, all operators' clocks shall be synchronized. Setting the time at the primary supervisor's console shall change the time display on every console. Only the primary supervisor has the capability to change the clock. MOMOTOROLA Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 1 67 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 1 ❖SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Dispatch Work Area The dispatch work area contains all resources including radio resources, phone lines and 1/0 controls. Each and all resources can be displayed in window tiles. All resources are organized into folders. Each folder has a tab labeled with the name of the folder. Up to six folders can be available for organizing different resources. Each folder is capable of containing at least 32 radio resource/phone line resource tiles or at least 64 1/0 resource tiles. (Higher resolution screens may contain more resource tiles per folder.) Each folder is capable of displaying a combination of radio resource, phone line, and 1/0 resource tiles. The same resource shall also be capable of being represented on different folders. These resource tiles are capable of being moved around on the screen to be placed anywhere within a folder. The operator shall be able to assign and de- assign any resource to the console. Resource Tiles Radio and telephone resource tiles are capable of being displayed in either the permanently expanded format or condensed/expandable format. The permanently expanded or expanded format shall be capable of supporting the following indication and command icons: Indication Icons I Command Icons Radio Inbound call Transmit/Instant Transmit Patch Coded/Clear Transmit/Busy Repeater Disable Cross mode Alert Repeat Enable Select Frequency Select PL Select Main/Standby Main/Standby, Main/Alternate Takeover Volume control Mute R 2 Console self repeat i@)M010ROLA Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 1 d• 68 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 1 ❖ SYSTEM DESCRIPTION In•ic.ti.n lens C•mm.n• lens Telephone Idle On/Off hook Ringing On hold Off hook at this operator position Phone/Radio Off hook at another position Radio/Phone On hold When a resource is selected, the tile border of that resource changes its color to green and the tile background of that selected resource shall be white in color. The condensed/expandable tile format is displayed in the condensed format normally. It is capable of being expanded to display more command icons. When expanded, the expanded tile does not cover up the indicator area of any other tile. The indicator area of any tile shall be visible at all times within a folder. Patch/Multi-Select Area There is an area on the screen dedicated to contain Patch and Multi-select setups. These setups are organized in the form of mini-folders with tabs labeled with the name of the patch group. Up to 16 patch groups and three multi-select groups are available. Each setup folder contains the setup members as well as setup and control commands. Activity Log The activities of the console system are displayed in an activity log. This activity log displays the resource alias and time of the last 25 inbound calls. The calls are displayed in a First-In, First-Out (FIFO)basis. The activity log can be placed anywhere on the screen. The activity log is capable of being resized from being hidden completely to its full size, displaying all 25 activities. The operator will be able to view a given patch/multi-select setup while in any main folder on the screen. Error Message/Status Area The one-line area at the bottom of the screen is designated to be the error message/status area. This area displays any user error or link status in text. This area shall be capable of containing up to 10 statuses. These statuses are stacked in a FIFO basis. The latest status is the one displayed in the one-line status area. However, this area shall be possible to be opened up to display a window which can be scrolled to display all 10 statuses. °MOTOROLA Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 1 ) 69 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 1 :• SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Resource Name Each resource tile will display the name of the resource it is associated with. This name may be changed by authorized personnel through the set-up function in the console database management terminal. The operator no longer has to associate numbers or button placement with a resource to perform any function. Call Indicator A call indicator is included on each resource tile. When a call is received on the select resource or on a resource not selected at any operator position, the call indicator shall flash to attract the operator's attention. Otherwise, the call indicator appears solid. To minimize potential distractions to the operator, no text or other call indication are displayed in the resource tile or elsewhere on the screen when an inbound call is not present. Select An operator can select a resource with a single button-press. The operator can select a resource by choosing the actual resource tile on the screen. When a resource tile is selected, the resource name will appear on a white background and the border of the resource tile will change to green. Selecting the resource will route receive audio to the Select speaker and will route microphone audio and PTT signals to the corresponding base interface module. Selecting any resource tile will deselect all other resource tiles of the same kind (unless the console is in the Multi-Select mode). One of each, radio and telephone, resources can be selected simultaneously. Volume Control The volume control provides a continuous volume level control. The volume level automatically reverts to the full level when the corresponding resource tile is selected, although the operator may manually switch to the variable level after selecting the resource. One volume control is provided in each resource tile. Volume level is indicated graphically. Changing the volume is represented with a graphical slider. The volume will decrease when the control is slid to the left and increase to the right. Text indication shall be available to indicate the change. C)MOTOROI-A Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 1 •. 70 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 1 ❖ SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Patch Indicator Icon A Patch indicator is included on each resource tile. This Patch indicator shows: whether the associated resource is in a patch at this operator position and which patch it is in; if it is in a patch at another operator position; or if it is not patched. A resource may participate in only one patch at a time. It is possible to establish up to 16 simultaneous cross- or phone-patch conversations per operator position. A patch does not inhibit the operator from continuing with normal dispatching functions. Transmit/Busy Indicator Icon A graphical Transmit/Busy indicator icon is included on each resource tile. This indicator shows whether the associated resource is in a transmit mode from this operator position or if it is in a busy mode due to a transmission from another operator position. The busy indicator will be displayed whenever any parallel operator connected to the same base station is transmitting on the resource or when the dispatcher is transmitting on another resource frequency on the same base station. Transmit Queue Waiting A transmit queue waiting feature is provided which allows two operators to wait"in line" for access to a busy resource by holding down their transmit control or footswitch. Multi-Frequency Transmitters When multi-frequency transmitters are present in the system, a frequency control/indicator can be provided in the appropriate resource control tile. All multiple frequency resource control tiles send the frequency control information to the base station and to all parallel consoles within one second following the change (unless the station is keyed). This control/indicator may be permanently displayed or hidden from view until it is required. The operator will be able to display or hide this control with minimal button presses. The user will be able to assign names of up to 14 characters to each frequency through the set-up function of the console database management terminal. Squelch Disable A squelch disable control will be able to be displayed on the screen to disable the coded squelch in base station receivers. The squelch disable control will be operable through a single button press. This control permits the operator to monitor the selected resource(s)before transmitting. The squelch disable control operates in parallel with the squelch disable footswitch. °MOTOROLA Attachment B--3/1312000 Section 1 ❖ 71 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 1 ❖SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Option Icons Resource options are represented on the screen by graphical icons. Each option will show one icon indicator for the option's "on" state and one for its "off' state. The operator can change the state of an output resource option by choosing the icon. On-line Help Extensive help instructions are available on the screen. These help instructions explain all major console operations and functions in an easily understandable way. Related help topics are linked and easily accessed via a single button press. The help instructions have graphical examples for each feature/definition. All radio operations continue as normal and critical resources will be able to be monitored while a help screen is being viewed. Customized Screen Configurations The installer, supervisor, or authorized personnel will be able to configure the operator position capabilities and screen display to suit different operator positions, different applications, or personal preferences. These configurations will be able to be done at any operator position. No additional equipment, nor any modification of PROM information, is required to perform the functions described. Any number of these screen configurations can be stored on the database server. These screen configurations are able to be backed-up and accessed by any operator position via the local area network. Access to configuring a screen display and loading a screen display are protected by passwords, so that only those authorized to access the screen display will be able to do so. It is possible to disable password protection. Customizing screen configuration does not interrupt any radio dispatch functions. Mute A timed unselect All Mute function is provided on the screen that mutes all console unselect audio by 42 dB after the function is activated. The audio shall be automatically restored to previous levels after 30 seconds or when the control is chosen a second time. This automatic timer is field adjustable up to 255 seconds via a console database management terminal. The muting level is also field adjustable from 0 to 42 dB in 6 dB increments via a console database management terminal. This function is capable of being displayed at all times or hidden from view until it is required by the operator. C)Morono1-A Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 1 ❖ 72 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 1 •SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Cross Mute It is possible to cross mute resources on a resource by resource basis, console wide to compensate for RF interference of transmitters and receivers (the maximum number shall depend upon system size). It is also be possible to acoustically cross mute resources on an operator by operator basis in order to eliminate acoustic feedback between co-located operators. This second type of acoustic cross muting will be automatically disabled on selected resources when a headset is plugged into the headset jack. Both types of cross muting are field programmable via the console database management program. Dispatcher Interrupt—ASTRO This feature allows a console operator to force a target ASTRO subscriber unit into an Enhanced Private Call regardless of what the target subscriber is currently doing (unless the target subscriber is transmitting) or at what wide area site the target subscriber is affiliated. The feature will allow the dispatcher to "find" a field unit wherever the unit is in the system, without trying various sites or talkgroups. 1.9.1.7 CENTRACOM Gold Series Central Electronics Bank General The central electronics package contains the base station interfaces and receiver interfaces that are required to control the system. It also contains the required operator interfaces, fruited system interfaces, signaling interfaces, and power supplies. All of the modules in the central electronics package consoles are contained in EIA panel-mount chassis (card cages). Each card cage incorporates plug-in slots for the various module interfaces. Future expansion can be accommodated by the addition of more card cages and/or interfaces into available card cage slots and reprogramming. Modules and Operation + Audio Signal Processing—Each audio signal presented to the central electronics package is converted to its digital equivalent using 64K-bit/Second Pulse Code-Modulation (or an equivalent digitization process). The digitized representation will be multiplexed, using Time Division Multiplexing techniques and routed to all other modules in the central electronics package. After routing, the digital signal is then be converted back to an audio signal. Up to 96 audio signals may be so processed. °MOTOROLA Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 1 c• 73 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 1 ❖SYSTEM DESCRIPTION d• Ambassador Interface Module (AIMI) — The CEB communicates with the Audio Switch via an AIMI. This interface from the CEB to the Audio Switch is redundant. Fault detection and switching is automatic. Each AIMI is driven by its own microprocessor. •S Console Operator Interface Module (COIM)— Each operator position communicates to, and is supervised by, its own operator interface module in the central electronics package. Each COIM is driven by its own microprocessor so that the entire system will not go out of service if a single processor fails. ❖ Conventional Base Station Interface—Each conventional base station interface incorporates the circuitry required to operate a remotely controlled single transmitter, single receiver base station. Each module consists of a plug- in printed circuit board that contains a microprocessor, its related circuits, digital automatic level control circuitry, a line driver amplifier, both two- and four-wire line termination transformers, and fault detection circuits. The module is capable of controlling a tone control base station when required. Both DC current regulator and E&M relay plug-on circuit board additions are available for base station control when required. Power Supply A continuous duty power supply is provided for furnishing regulated low voltage to the central electronics package. The regulator circuit incorporates an electronic "crowbar" circuit to protect console equipment from excessive voltage should a malfunction occur. Short circuit current limiting is provided on each regulator circuit to protect the regulator circuit from accidental shorts and thereby prevent nuisance fuse blowing. Depending upon system size, two or more power supplies are configured in a hot standby mode such that, if one supply fails, its redundant backup shall take over. The power supply is EIA 19" rack mountable, switch-mode, and modular. The power supply may be powered by any line voltage from 93 to 264 Volts RMS and input frequencies including 47 to 63 Hz with no modification. The power supply supplies 15.8 Volts and 9.0 Volts. Backup batteries provide continuous operation 30 minutes at full load. M Morowoen Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 1 •:• 74 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 1 ❖SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Redundancy The CENTRACOM Gold Series console has extensive redundancy. A failure of any one resource, such as a radio interface, will not affect the operation of the remaining resources. The console system incorporates distributed independent multiprocessors to provide multiple level redundancy. The microprocessor associated with each operator is fully capable of independent operation. In the event that one or more of these units fail, the remaining processor(s) still are capable of carrying on console operations. The degree of redundancy shall correspond to the number of operators in the system. Redundant base station interface electronics are available(optional). Redundant central electronics package power supply(ies) (optional) can be provided. Fault Maintenance The CENTRACOM Gold Series console has extensive fault maintenance built in to protect Weld County from an undetected failure. The console system is designed such that no single failure will disable more than one channel or more than one operator console. Any duplication of circuits required to attain this performance is provided with the exception of central electronics power supplies. The control center modules are designed with the capability to automatically check themselves and other modules and to perform specific self-healing actions should a malfunction be detected. The console system does not rely on a single test node to perform the diagnostic/self- healing functions described below,but rather has multiple redundant diagnostic systems. The major intelligence for the Fault Detection system is provided on the operator interface electronics. Each operator interface module independently determines if any failure exists through the tests described in subsequent paragraphs. The degree of fault detection redundancy shall correspond to the number of operators in the system. Each module in the central electronics package independently sends data messages at least every five seconds. The operator interface modules notes any two consecutive communications failures from any module. Every message on the central electronics digital bus includes Cyclical Redundancy Check (CRC) security measures or equivalent. Every message from the operator consoles to the central electronics package includes checksum security measures or equivalent. MOMOTOROLA Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 1 •:• 75 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 1 ❖ SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Each console operator interface module contains a detector to periodically check for the presence of guard tone from the central timer module. Any failures starts diagnostic procedures. When a console operator interface module is not processing an audio signal, it periodically digitizes guard tone and inserts this guard tone onto the digital voice bus. The module then decodes this digitized guard tone and checks for its presence. Each console operator interface module also periodically digitizes guard tone and sends this guard tone to a base station interface module. The interface module then decodes the signal and loops the audio through different stages on the module, including the digital automatic level control circuitry stage, and returns a digitized signal to the operator interface module. Three different loops on the base station interface (including the line transformer) are tested. When a failure or an error associated with data message integrity or guard tone generation/detection is noted, the operator interface modules will "vote" to switch to a second central timer module. If a majority of the operator interface modules agree, the switch will occur and the operator interface modules will re-evaluate the system. If the failure/error is corrected no further action shall be required. No single test circuit used for diagnostic testing; the purpose being to protect the system from incorrect diagnostic actions which could result if the single diagnostic test circuit failed.. The detection of a malfunction or the occurrence of self-healing actions are available at a serial-data system printer port that is connected to one of the operator interface modules. The identity of modules which have been switched off the bus structure during diagnostic operation will be logged on the printer. A special indicator on failed modules is illuminated. The printout of diagnostic and/or self-healing actions will be generated only at the time of the occurrence and will not reprint unnecessarily'. All console operator positions will be notified (by both message and alarm) of any error(s) that have been detected by a majority of the console operator interface modules. The alarm notification will consist of several tone bursts and abbreviated message on the console operator position. (M)Moronoe. Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 1 ❖ 76 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 1 ❖SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 1.9.2 QUANTAR IntelliRepeater The IntelliRepeater's innovative design allows for easy upgrades by adding modules or reprogramming the software. This flexible design minimizes major infrastructure (hardware) replacements, ensuring cost-effective technology migration. Motorola's IntelliRepeater repeater is part of a new generation of base station repeaters. It features rugged construction to ensure system reliability combined with a software-driven, modular component design that results in: ❖ Efficient use of space ❖ Flexibility in application ❖ Easy maintenance + Designed-in technology migration capability Motorola has proposed the IntelliRepeater platform for all of the County's base stations/repeaters: The following features apply to the IntelliRepeater configurations proposed to Weld County. • The IntelliRepeater's innovative design will allow the County to easily upgrade by adding modules or reprogramming the software. This flexible design minimizes major infrastructure (hardware) replacements, ensuring cost-effective technology migration. ♦ IntelliRepeater repeaters perform self-diagnostics at startup and continuously as long as power is applied. If the diagnostics detect errors or glitches, the IntelliRepeater can self-correct in most cases without affecting the operation of the station. IntelliRepeater's continuous diagnostic evaluation is effective in preventing more serious problems that: could cause station downtime. • The built-in diagnostic software detects errors when they are still small and easy to correct, which minimizes maintenance costs providing cost-savings benefits for the County. Rugged Construction for Maximum System Reliability The IntelliRepeater has a rugged design, shielded modules, and all metal construction. The station has been designed and tested to MIL-STD-810C and 810D to withstand vibration and dust environments that many fixed installations experience. During the OM Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 1 •) 77 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 1 ❖ SYSTEM DESCRIPTION design phase, IntelliRepeaters were subjected to Accelerated Life Testing (ALT) to simulate 10 years of field stress. The final product meets the highest level of component and workmanship quality, ensuring maximum reliability. Modular Design for: ❖ Efficient use of space ❖ Flexibility in application ❖ Easy maintenance ❖ Future technology migration capability Efficient Use of Space The IntelliRepeater fits into a standard 19-inch rack and is only 8.75 inches high and 14.2 inches deep. This unit houses the power amplifier, exciter,power supply, control and receiver modules that are interconnected via the card cage's backplane. The unit's compact design allows eight stations to be mounted on a single 7-foot open rack. A IntelliRepeater requires much less space than a traditionally sized repeater, and it weighs only 55 pounds. Flexibility in Application IntelliRepeater is a software-controlled station that can be configured to provide analog conventional, digital conventional, or ASTRO, SMARTNET/Simulcast trunked operation capabilities. It can be used in system applications from conventional single site to multi-site, trunked wide-area systems. IntelliRepeater's add-on capabilities ensure that it can adapt and evolve. IntelliRepeater meets the County's communication needs today and can transition to meet the requirements of the future. Easy, Inexpensive Maintenance IntelliRepeater is designed to be inherently reliable. Without affecting communications, it performs self-diagnostics and self-corrects minor discrepancies. Each IntelliRepeater is totally composed of independent Field Replaceable Units (FRUs), featuring a fully modular power amplifier and power supply with a convenient on/off switch. State-of-the-art technologies, such as digital signal processors, surface-mount components, and microprocessor control, are built in, and more than 97% of these components are surface-mounted and auto-inserted. This results in consistent and accurate part placement, and therefore, higher quality circuit boards. IntelliRepeater's 100% solid-state design minimizes the possibility of defects. (I3 acoronorra Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 1 :• 78 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 1 ❖SYSTEM DESCRIPTION IntelliRepeater's modular design also makes troubleshooting, maintenance, and repair simple and inexpensive. IntelliRepeater's station and ancillary equipment operate under software control via the Station Control Module (SCM). Since virtually all station operating parameters are monitored and self-corrected by the SCM., most routine tuning and maintenance is unnecessary. When troubleshooting is required, however, the County's service personnel can use Motorola's Radio Service Software (RSS) to perform diagnostic tests. The RSS can be run on a DOS based computer with RS-232 communication port capability. The RS- 232 diagnostic and programming port on the front of the IntelliRepeater unit is easily accessible, making troubleshooting and service easy to perform. By connecting the PC to the RS-232 port and using RSS, the service technician can access alarm log files, run diagnostics, and set up various audio and RF tests. Diagnostic tests/metering are available for the station control, exciter, power amplifier, power supply, and receiver. The County's service personnel can choose whether each test is to be run upon startup and/or on demand. The mean time between failures for the IntelliRepeater is approximately seven years. But, should a component fail, IntelliRepeater's modular FRU design allows quick, easy change out of modules. Service personnel extract the old module from the front of the station and insert a spare. The faulty module is then shipped to a Motorola repair depot for further troubleshooting and repair. IntelliRepeater's capability to perform internal diagnostics and self-correction combined with its minimal maintenance and service requirements result in a highly reliable,easy-to-maintain station. Designed-In Technology Migration Capability IntelliRepeater's modular, software-driven design provides system configuration flexibility. IntelliRepeaters can be configured to support both conventional and trunking operations. And, it can be migrated from analog to digital, from a conventional single-site radio to multi-site wide-area trunked systems, from wide channel spacing to narrow channel spacing. Component or system replacement is not necessary. With IntelliRepeater, you can build the system you need today and easily add new modules or modify the software to upgrade your system to meet future requirements. °MOTOROLA Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 1 :• 79 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 1 ❖SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 1.9.2.1 Key Features ❖ Self Test Diagnostics—On power-up and during operation, the IntelliRepeater station automatically initiates self-tests without interfering with communications. Station alarm messages and self-diagnostic test results are logged. The service technician can view the LEDs on the module's front panels to determine the station's status. If problems are detected, the service technician can use a personal computer(PC) and the Radio Service Software (RSS) to access the test results and any alarm messages and determine what action is required. These internal alarms will be integrated into the Motorola MOSCAD system as described in the System Description. d• Convenient Connection Access — Installation and maintenance can be performed quickly and easily. All primary installation connectors are located on the rear of the station. Routine service ports are located on the front of the station. During maintenance or repair, all modules can be removed from the front of the station. • Software-driven Station Control Module—The IntelliRepeater station is composed of modules that are linked and driven by internal software. 'the Station Control Module (SCM) contains the microprocessor, station-operating software and codeplug that define the station's capabilities. Upgrading a station is simple, in many cases involving only software modifications. Often, hardware change out is not required so upgrade costs are lower than they would be with a traditional type of station. • Continuous Duty Operation —IntelliRepeater is designed for continuous duty at full-rated power. This means that the station may be used in intermittent or continuous service without fear of failure or reduced performance. ❖ Advanced, High-power Transmitter Design —IntelliRepeater's advanced 100-watt transmitter design exceeds most RF power requirements. An internal, calibrated watt meter continuously monitors output power. The watt meter output feeds a power control loop that continually adjusts and maintains the desired output power on a per channel basis. All deviation and power adjustments are electronic, which lowers cost by reducing manual tuning adjustments at installation. • Digital Receiver—The station's receive circuitry features multiple bandwidth (12.5, or 25 kHz) capability, as well as ASTRO digital operation. The frequency synthesizer circuitry, which is electronically controlled by the Station Control Module, generates the injection signals for the first and second mixers. All receive signals are received and digitized before being sent to the Station Control Module, providing consistent audio quality. �MA)MO-roROtA Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 1 + 80 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 1 ❖ SYSTEM DESCRIPTION • Built-In Single Circulator—Each IntelliRepeater station includes a built-in circulator that protects against antenna system mismatches and reduces interference caused by equipment at crowded sites. RF energy from other stations can mix in the final stages of a transmitter, causing intermodulation interference. The circulator minimizes unwanted RF energy entering the transmitter, reducing intermodulation interference. 1.9.2.2 Options Multi Voltage AC Power Supply Motorola's advanced technology has yielded a state-of-the-art switchable power supply that can operate over a wide range of voltages (90 to 264 Vdc) and frequencies (47 to 63 Hz) without any modifications or jumper changes. This new power supply is smaller, lightweight, and efficient. 1.9.2.3 Conclusion In summation, IntelliRepeaters are: ❖ Able to perform self-diagnostics and self-correct minor glitches without affecting communications Easy to repair or upgrade by exchanging or adding modules and/or by modifying the software •3 Easy to upgrade by reprogramming the software. Reprogramming also makes upgrading lower in cost than for traditional stations that require hardware change outs IntelliRepeaters can be configured to fit almost any communications need. As the County's communication needs change, you can add new modules or make software modifications to upgrade your system's capability. IntelliRepeaters can meet your communication needs today and grow with you to become your system of tomorrow. 1.9.3 ASTRO Digital Interface Unit The Digital Interface Unit (DIU) 3000 equipment proposed for this system is the digital-to-analog voice coding (vocoding) unit for the fixed infrastructure system. The radio stations at each radio site pass and repeat the digitized audio the field units, mobiles and portables, communicate with, but they do not decode the digital stream into analog voice. The DIU-3000 completes this important task. MOMOTOROLA Attachment B--3113/2000 Section 1 •:• 81 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 1 ❖SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The DIU-3000 units are collocated with the SmartZone Master Controller and Audio Switch (AEB). There will be one unit for each voice channel in the system. The units are rack mounted in chassis with their associated data broadcast units. The DAJ-3000 units are assigned by the SmartZone controller to perform encode and decode in a trunked mode, no unit is assigned to any one repeater channel. This method inhibits channel failure related issues, by not allowing a channel to be in failure mode based on the failure of a DIU unit. Analog audio is necessary during ASTRO digital conversations for the dispatch console subsystem and the logging recorder subsystem. All digital-to-analog transitions are processed by the DIUs at this site and forwarded to the proper devices via the audio switch. The SmartZone controller communicates directly with all the DIUs at the site. The SmartZone controller uses one of its control ports to communicate with up to 32 DIUs. The data communication is distributed by a set of Data Broadcast Boxes that manages the digital control stream from the SmartZone controller. The set of DIUs is used by the SmartZone controller as needed, where one unit does not always carry the same type of information. Each talkgroup requesting a call is assigned a DIU dynamically to process the audio to their dispatch console operators and/or link audio to their logging recorder track. The DIU also manages optional digital encryption functionality. If a talkgroup is using encrypted communications, the DIU can be programmed to decode their coded messages for the console, recorder, or telephone as required. The DIU separates the ASTRO digitized audio and ASTRO embedded signaling to be processed on different paths to the presentation devices. TeNSr digital channel banks process the digital and analog audio between the AEB and DIUs. The embedded signaling is processed via the SmartZone controller port. The DIU-3000 is packaged in a chassis mounted module with front panel programming controls and display indicators. Four modules are mounted in a rack mounted card cage. There are blank space cover plates to complete the finished appearance and protect the enclosed electronics in unpopulated spaces. The 22 button keypad is used for initial system installation, ongoing modifications, and system maintenance. There are four LED indicators for local diagnostic monitoring. The LCD display indicates programming functions and diagnostics. The display has a clock and VU meter reading. The racks for the DIUs and Data Broadcast Boxes are located together at the site and their interface wiring modularized and dressed to the appropriate terminating equipment. ��wioroaoa o Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 1 ❖ 82 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 1 ❖ SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The full duplex audio interfaces include the digital V.24 interface that processes the ASTRO digital signaling and a four wire analog audio interface for the console and logging recorder. Most critical functionality programming is protected by password access control. There is storage of diagnostic messages for later maintenance retrieval. 1.9.4 XTS 3000 Portable Radio 1.9.4.1 Overview Motorola's ASTRO Digital XTS 3000 portable Radio Models are second-generation digital two-way radios for the land mobile environment. Because the XTS 3000 is fully digital, it can deliver consistent audio quality across more of your coverage area—even in fringe areas! The digital technology improves signal integrity to maximize clean, clear communications. The XTS 3000 provides the solution to a wide range of sophisticated wireless needs-- signaling schemes, encryption, analog and digital compatibility, conventional and trunking operation all within a small, ergonomically designed unit. The XTS 3000 is the result of market research which solicited customer inputs and requirements to help determine the most desirable XTS 3000 form and function attributes. Specifically, the introduction of the XTS 3000 provides a portable redesign that is intended to meet these stated customer needs and desires for comprehensive capability—but within a smaller package! The XTS 3000 portable Radios provide communication solutions that include a comprehensive package of features and functions that bring many advantages directly to the County such as: •b Flexibility ❖ Durability/Reliability ❖ User Friendly Ergonomics Flexibility The XTS 3000 is easily migrated and/or integrated into many kinds of existing or newly revised system applications including PROJECT 25 system release. The XTS 3000 provides users with the flexibility for both conventional and trunked system operations. °MOTOROLA Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 1 C. 83 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 1 ❖SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Multiple software package options make it possible to adapt the XTS 3000 to meet the County's system requirements. Capabilities include conventional frequency operation. XTS 3000 portable radios are compact in size and reduced in weight, thus, providing a smaller radio without sacrificing features or radio capabilities. Channel spacing of 12.5/20/25 kHz in 800 MHz operation within a radio which complies with global channel spacing requirements, while increasing user applications. The XTS 3000 portable radios are designed for maximum interoperability within analog, SECURENET, and second-generation digital applications. The XTS 3000 portable can transmit 9.6 kilobits/second of user information while operating on narrowband 12.5 kHz channels. These operating modes can be programmed into the radios on a channel-by channel basis. XTS 3000 portables are also compatible within most of Motorola's current analog and SECURENET radio systems. The XTS 3000 portables are capable of transmitting and receiving Stat-Alert (MDC 1200), SECURENET, Advanced SECURENET and Private Line/Digital Private Line analog information as required. Encryption capability assures the use of XTS 3000 portables in environments that require protection of proprietary information. FLASHport provides the County with the ability to change, expand and modify their systems without hardware obsolescence. Because the XTS 3000 is FLASHport capable, the County can select only those system features needed today and upgrade them as the needs change. Radio Service Software (RSS)programmability allows the customer to program/reprogram the XTS 3000 to meet current and future requirements. The ASTRO portable RSS has been reengineered for use with the ASTRO Saber as well as the XTS 3000. Durability/Reliability The XTS 3000 is designed to ensure the reliability of operation in even the most adverse environments, thus making it an excellent choice for any and all portable radio users. Military Specifications 810 C, D and E and European IP 54 ensures reliability in even the toughest of applications no need to worry about selecting the XTS 3000 for long term reliability. In addition, the XTS 3000 meets Project 25 standards. C>M Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 1 ❖ 84 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 1 ❖SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The XTS 3000 includes a housing made of Polycarbonate blend which has been designed to withstand many years of rugged use. The County may select a nickel cadmium or optional nickel metal hydride battery. Also, for use within hazardous environments, the XTS 3000 provides a selection of batteries for use with factory mutual approved radios for intrinsically safe/ruggedized use. Motorola's FLASHport Software Maintenance Agreement (SMA)provides assurances above and beyond traditional warranties. FLASHport's SMA ensures added protection over the life of the system automatically providing subscribers with new release of applicable system software on a periodic basis. User Friendly Ergonomics One of the advantages most often desired by large system users is the ease of operation. The County wants to be assured that the radio equipment you invest in is user friendly and operationally"intuitive" for all your workers. •3 Acoustically integrated, built-in noise canceling microphone for clearer communications in noisy environments Note: In the digital mode, the IMBE Vocoder in conjunction with the built-in digital signal processor(DSP)further enhances noise canceling by eliminating background noise. • Trunking one touch button operation provides feature access with a mere press of a button ❖ Programmable buttons allow users to customize his/her radio to meet individual business needs Size is always an advantage in today's marketplace, where radio users are raising the bar on their technological expectations and size considerations. The XTS 3000 portable radios meet this challenge by offering both analog and digital capabilities, enhanced system operations, dynamic ergonomic design—all within a very competitively sized package. 1.9.4.2 Key Features Defined ❖ Secure capable ❖ Talkaround/dual-mode operation ❖ Scan • Trunking priority monitor MOMOTOROLA Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 1 C. 85 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 1 ❖ SYSTEM DESCRIPTION • SmartZone full-spectrum scan ❖ Call Alert Encode/Decode ❖ Emergency with voice to follow ❖ Private conversation Secure Capable All XTS 3000 radios included in Motorola's proposal are ASTRO digital and secure capable to allow the County the option of adding Motorola's digital voice encryption. This feature is important when the protection of information is vital. Voice encryption is a highly sophisticated digital coding technique that provides maximum protection. Only radios with voice encryption technology and the proper decryption key are able to decode the information. This makes it virtually impossible for unauthorized parties to monitor the transmission. The XTS 3000 offers operation on a complete set of Motorola encryption algorithms: DES, DES-XL, DVP, DVP-XL, and DES-OFB. Talkaround Dual Mode Operation The option for operating in trunked or conventional systems includes Conventional Repeater/Direct within each radio. When out of the range of the repeater, this direct operation allows for radio-to-radio communications on a separate channel that is programmed with frequency pairs other than those that talk through the repeater or trunked system; i.e., the NPSPAC mutual aid channels. ASTRO IMBE operation is available in this mode, if desired. With the XTS 3000 the County can program channels in the configuration that is optimal for his/her communication needs. Operation of trunking and conventional modes in one radio provides maximum flexibility. This feature is especially important to customers who require communications on multiple system types or within many types of applications. Scan Scan is a feature that allows the County to monitor activity on different talkgroups by scanning a"scan list."Each radio can have up to 20 different scan lists. The talkgroups to be scanned can be programmed with the RSS or manually on keypad- equipped radios. Three types of scan modes are available in the XTS 3000 portable radios: ❖ Trunking Priority Monitor is used with talkgroups on trunking system channels (10 channels maximum) ®Morowota Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 1 :• 86 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 1 ❖ SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ❖ Conventional Scan allows for monitoring of up to 10 different conventional channels ❖ Talkgroup Scan allows for monitoring of conventional and trunked channels from more than one trunking system (10 different channels maximum). Priority operation is not available in this type of list. Other scan capabilities include the following items: ❖ With Priority-One Scanning enabled, one member of the scan list is chosen as the priority-one member. Any activity on this channel will be heard on the speaker even if another channel in the scan list has activity on it. ❖ With Priority-Two and Non-Priority Scanning enabled, a second channel (in addition to the priority one channel) can be assigned as a priority-two channel. The remaining members in the scan list can be programmed as non-priority members of the scan list. ❖ Automatic Scan (Autoscan) allows the XTS 3000 radio to begin scanning whenever the County selects a channel to which a scan list is assigned or strapped. The radio continues to scan until the channel is changed to one that does not have autoscan. ❖ Operator-Selectable Scan can be programmed to be selected by a softkey related button or a Scan On/Off Switch. Trunking Priority Monitor Trunking Priority Monitor allows selected talkgroups to be assigned priority status. Whenever a priority talkgroup is active, the radio will immediately switch to this talkgroup. Priority Monitor can be used on a single trunked system only. This type of scanning allows the County to monitor a list of talkgroups, with up to two talkgroups given priority status. Priority Monitor ensures that users receive information from important talkgroups immediately, even if they are listening to conversations of lower priority communications. It provides the ability to monitor conversations on other talkgroups without having to change systems or talkgroups on the radio. Priority Monitor enables the user to give immediate attention to a specific call or problem. SmartZone Full Spectrum Scan The XTS 3000 portable radio is capable of SmartZone full spectrum scan. This feature allows the County to scan all frequencies for a control channel within the radio band A MOTOROLA Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 1 .. 87 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 1 ❖ SYSTEM DESCRIPTION range without being limited to only those frequencies that are pre-programmed via the Radio Service Software (RSS). Full spectrum scan allows the radio to search for the control channel frequencies across the radio band range, in addition to those programmed via RSS. This feature reduces the possibility of NOT being able to find all possible operating channels. Another advantage to users occur when additional system capability(with new frequencies) is added. With full spectrum scan, radios do not have to be reprogrammed. Call Alert Encode/Decode The Call Alert function allows a caller to leave a"page" in an unattended radio. This prevents users from tying up air time calling unattended radios. Since the page is both visual and audio, this feature is particularly beneficial for radio users whose jobs frequently take them away from their radio, or who operate in a noisy environment. In addition, call alert audio tones may be used as a method to locate a misplaced radio. Call Alert Encode enables a radio to initiate the call alert feature to those radios programmed with the decode capability. Call Alert Encode is available as follows: Models I and II: 19 Programmable List Members Model III Unlimited Encode Call Alert eliminates tying up air time trying to reach an unattended radio, or a radio operating in a noisy environment. The dispatcher knows that a message has been left for the operator. The alert tone can also be used as a predetermined message such as "call the office" or"meet at headquarters". Emergency with Voice to Follow Emergency with voice to follow is a feature that automatically transmits voice in the hands-free mode for a preprogrammed time period following the sending of an emergency call. This feature assures that pertinent information is provided during a crisis situation. Emergency with voice to follow offers added security to the radio user by allowing the transmission of voice messages immediately after the emergency alert initiation. This feature ensures that details of the emergency situation are conveyed and explained immediately, thus reducing anxiety and conjecture about the situation. This feature is important to users who work in high-risk operations. (M)iworonoua Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 1 ) 88 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 1 ❖SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Private Conversation Within a trunking application, private conversation/call allows the County to selectively call (encode) an individual radio and hold a conversation that other radios in the talk group cannot hear. Private Conversation Encode enables a radio programmed with capability to initiate the private conversation feature to a radio programmed with the decode capability. Private Conversation Encode is available as follows: Models I and II 19 Programmable List Members Model III Unlimited Encode Private Conversation reduces radio operator fatigue and annoyance by eliminating the need for unintended radio listeners from hearing conversations not concerning them. It is often used by supervisors for private conversations with another supervisor, or with a subordinate. The XTS 3000 is a dynamic addition to Motorola's digital capable portable radios. The three available models (I, II and III) allow users to select an ergonomically capable radio the meets specific features/function needs. System selection plays a key role during the model and software selection process. 1.9.4.3 Other Key System Software Features Out of Range Indication The trunking out of range indicator feature has four programmable operating modes: • No indication ❖ Display indication ❖ Audio alert indication ❖ Both audio and display indications Out of range indications will display as soon as a radio moves out of the system range. Since the out of range indicator is not dependent upon transmitting or other user intervention, this means the user can have immediate awareness of system status. °MOTOROLA Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 1 .• 89 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 1 ❖SYSTEM DESCRIPTION One-Touch Button Operation (Trunking)—Optional One touch button operation is programmable in the trunking mode. This enables users to minimize keystrokes by quickly accessing frequently used features with the touch of a single button. Up to four buttons are programmable as "one touch"buttons. Features include: ❖ Call Alert ❖ Private Call •• Telephone Inter Connect This "one touch" feature can also serve as a method for limiting phone, private call and call alert capabilities on a radio. 11.9.5 ASTRO Digital Spectra Mobile Radio Overview The ASTRO Digital Spectra, Motorola's first fully digital two-way mobile radio, was designed for maximum flexibility in the land mobile environment. Fully capable of operation in multiple modes (including ASTRO APCO 25 CAI digital in 12.5/25 kHz or analog in 12.5/25 kHz) the radios can operate in either the trunked or conventional mode in these formats. Each mode of operation can be programmed into a radio on a channel-by-channel basis. In addition, Spectra mobiles support encrypted operation with the addition of a module, priced as a factory installed or field installed module. 1.9.5.1 Spectra Development The Spectra was developed to address the need of field personnel for multi-functional mobile radios in a compact, ergonomic, and user-friendly package. Because the ASTRO Digital Spectra is fully digital, it can deliver this level of flexibility without compromising coverage. The ASTRO Digital Spectra works with Motorola SMARTNET analog, and ASTRO 25 digital systems. 1.9.5.2 Advantages of the Spectra Flexibility •• Multiple system configurations including: Conventional, Trunking, and SECURENET ❖ Analog and Digital capability ❖ Multiple hardware configurations (M)Morosrot a Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 1 :• 90 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 1 ❖ SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ❖ Multiple software package options ❖ FLASHport technology for expansion User-Friendly Ergonomics •b Alphanumeric display ❖ Dialing from pre-stored lists ❖ Direct entry keypad capability ❖ Programmable soft keys ❖ Dash and remote mount configurations 1.9.5.3 Technical Features of the Spectra All ASTRO Digital Spectra Mobile radios models include the following: ❖ Extraordinary Digital audio • Multiple modes of operation in a single radio: (ASTRO Digital clear and encrypted, Analog, and SECURENET, encrypted operation) ❖ Narrow and wide bandwidth Digital receiver(12.5, 20, 25 kHz) ❖ ASTRO data capable • Mil Specs 810 C, D, & E accepted ❖ FLASHport system radio upgradable ❖ Embedded Digital signaling (ASTRO) • Programmable RF power ❖ Enhanced encryption capability(optional): 16 encryption keys, 2 encryption algorithms ❖ Dash and remote mount configurations MOMOTOROLA Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 1 ❖ 91 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 1 ❖ SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ASTRO Digital Spectra Model W4 also includes: ❖ 128 Modes-Talkgroups-Conventional Channels ❖ 8-Character alphanumeric display ❖ Rotary mode and volume control ASTRO Digital Spectra Model W7 also includes: ❖ 255 Channels ❖ 8-Character alphanumeric display ❖ 3 x 4 Keypad for direct phone or private call dialing ❖ Electronic mode and volume control 11.9.5.4 Standard Features + Multiple System Configurations—The Spectra is compatible with a broad number of system configurations, thus making the radio applicable to many user situations. The Spectra operates in multiple Motorola system configurations that include both conventional and trunked SMARTNET or SmartZone systems in both analog and Digital ASTRO CAI (IMBE) modulation. ❖ Field Programmable—The ASTRO Digital Spectra allows you to program your mobile radio through Motorola Radio Service Software (RSS). This easy to use software permits you to conveniently program your radio based upon your system requirements. Since one RSS package will program any ASTRO Digital Spectra mobile, many configurations can be programmed to meet your needs. • FLASHport Capability—FLASHport provides system owners/operators with the ability to change, expand and modify their systems without significant hardware obsolescence. Because the ASTRO Digital Spectra is FLASHport capable, a user can select only those system features needed today and upgrade them as the needs change. + Digital Ready— The ASTRO Digital Spectra portable is available in a"digital ready" version that initially operates in an analog trunked or conventional system. When Project 25 digital operation is needed, the radio may be upgraded in the field, via FLASHport. (M)Morowor.n Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 1 + 92 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 1 ❖ SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ❖ Repeater/Direct— The repeater/direct feature allows you to bypass the repeater and talk directly to another radio. This is known as DIRECT operation or talkaround operation. The transmit frequency is the same as the receive frequency. In REPEATER operation, the user talks though the repeater when in range. This is usually the most effective method. However, when out-of-range of the repeater, the user can try to talk direct with another radio. This can be a planned or emergency operational mode. ❖ Multiple Squelch Operation —Conventional channels can be programmed with a Tone Private Line (PL), a Digital Private Line (DPL) code, or can be operated in carrier squelch. When in carrier squelch operation, all traffic on the channel is heard. When in PL, or DPL operation, your radio responds to only those messages intended for you. PL, DPL, and carrier squelch can be programmed on a per channel basis. ❖ Scan Operation — The scan feature allows the user to monitor different conventional and/or trunked modes as well as trunked system talkgroups without changing the mode-select switch. There are three different types of scan lists available; Conventional Scan, Trunking Priority Monitor, and Talkgroup Scan. In Conventional Scan, the radio will scan for convention channels looking for voice activity. When activity is located, the user will join the conversation already in progress. Conventional Scan allows 16 members per scan list and supports Non-priority or Priority scan. In Trunking Priority Monitor, the radio will scan talkgroup modes on one (properly programmed) system looking for voice activity. When activity is located, the user will join the conversation already in progress. Trunking Priority Monitor is only available on Trunking systems and can scan contain 16 members per scan list, and scanning is limited to a single system. In Talkgroup Scan, the radio will scan trunking talkgroups and conventional channels from more than one system looking for voice activity. When activity is located, the user will join the conversation already in progress. Talkgroup Scan allows 10 members per scan list and will not support priority scan. Talkgroup scan allows scanning across multiple systems. Secure Operation (Optional)— Secure operation provides the highest level of commercially-available voice security on trunked or conventional channels. Unlike lesser forms of security, Motorola Digital encryption provides signaling that makes it virtually impossible for others to decode any part of an encrypted message. Only radios with voice encryption technology and the proper MOMOOOOOLA Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 1 d• 93 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 1 C. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION decryption key are able to decode the information. Unauthorized parties cannot monitor the encrypted transmission. The ASTRO Digital Spectra mobile radio is capable of encrypted communications in both the 9.6 kbps ASTRO (12.5 kHz) mode and 12 kbps CVSD SECURENET (25 kHz)mode and offers operation in a complete set of Motorola encryption algorithms including: DES, DES-XL, DVP, DVP-XL, DVI-XL (International), and DES-OFB (Project 25 Standard). L9.5.5 Trunking Features ❖ Audible Status Tones • Trunked System Busy— If all voice channels are in use, the radio emits a busy tone, similar to a telephone busy tone. The busy tone indicates that the request for a voice channel has been recognized by the system. The user is then placed in a queue until channel assignment is made by the control computer. • Callback—When a radio in queue is assigned a voice channel, a series of three short tones indicates that a channel has been assigned and the conversation can begin. The user has two seconds to start using the channel or the radio goes back to the control channel and will have to request a channel assignment once again, while other user groups share the system. • Talk Permit—Each time the PTT switch is activated and a voice channel assignment is granted, a series of short tones (identical to callback tones) will signal the user that a channel has been assigned and he is free to begin the conversation. These tones may be turned off or on using the Radio Service Software programming. • Out of Range/Talk Prohibit—If a radio user attempts to transmit while out of range of the system, the radio generates a continuous low pitched tone until the PTT switch is released. This tone is also generated when the radio is switched to an unprogrammed mode. ❖ Selective Radio Inhibit— Selective Radio Inhibit allows the system manager to selectively deny an individual radio access to the radio system over-the-air through commands sent via the management terminal. Once inhibited, the radio is inoperable until the dispatcher restores it to operation. ❖ Dynamic Regrouping—Dynamic Regrouping enables a system manager to modify the talkgroup assignments of any individual radio from a system manager terminal. For example, a supervisor might use this feature to create C)MOTORO A Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 1 C• 94 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 1 ❖SYSTEM DESCRIPTION specific groups for tactical operations, emergencies, disasters, or"storm plans". The operation is performed from a management terminal. • Emergency Alarm/Emergency Call - Emergency Alarm/Emergency Call are used by radio operators to inform dispatch personnel of a life threatening situation. In the emergency alarm feature, data is transmitted to dispatch via the control channel. This alerts the dispatcher of the emergency condition and identifies the unit sending the emergency signal. The emergency call feature is a type of dispatch operation which gives the radio priority access to the system. The emergency call feature is programmable through RSS and is typically set up for the top of the queue. The call is then placed in the top of the queue in order to get access to the next available channel. + Push to Talk ID— Push to talk ID allows the radios to generate their ID so that the dispatcher can identify the radio caller currently speaking. The ID of the transmitting radio is automatically sent when the PTT button is pressed. This ID is displayed on a properly equipped console. The ID's are displayed each time the push to talk is pressed. Note: Selective Radio Inhibit, Dynamic Regrouping, Emergency Alarm/Emergency Call, and Push to Talk ID require special software and management terminal equipment at the fixed network sites. Radios only respond to terminal commands. + Call Alert—The call alert function allows a caller to leave a"page" in an unattended radio. This prevents users from tying up airtime calling unattended radios. Since the page is both visual and auditory, this feature is particularly beneficial for radio users whose jobs frequently take them away from their radio, or who operate in a noisy environment. When the Call Alert is sent, the receiving radio will emit a series of tones until the user responds or resets the radio. Any button press will turn off the Call Alert indicators. The radios can be programmed to operate Call alert in several different ways. Call Alert Encode Only enables a radio programmed with this capability to initiate a call alert. Call Alert Decode Only enables a radio to only receive call alert pages. A radio can also be programmed for both Call Alert Encode and Decode, so the user can place and receive calls. Limited Call Alert allows the user to only place calls from the preprogrammed list. With unlimited call alert, the user may place calls to any radio using the keypad. ❖ Private Conversation —Private Conversation allows the user to selectively call an individual radio and hold a private conversation that other radios in the talkgroup cannot hear. Once the private conversation is established, the two units will not hear any other normal radio traffic that occurs while the private MOTOROLA Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 1 ❖ 95 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 1 ❖ SYSTEM DESCRIPTION conversation is in progress. These capabilities are activated through RSS. PC encode is available in two ways, limited and unlimited. With limited PC, the user must select from a preprogrammed list. Up to 8 IDs (6 digit) can be programmed into one personality of the radio. Multiple personalities can be activated to increase the call list. With unlimited PC, the target user ID is entered via the keypad. Private Conversation Encode enables a radio programmed with this capability to initiate a private conversation to another radio. Private Conversation Decode enables a radio to only receive calls. A radio can also be programmed for Private Conversation Encode and Decode, so the user can place and receive private conversation calls. ❖ Failsoft—Certain major failures in a trunking system cause the radio to revert to failsoft operation and automatically switch to its failsoft channel. During failsoft, the trunking repeaters will transmit a medium-pitched tone every 10 seconds. When the trunking system returns to normal operation, your radio will automatically leave the failsoft operation and return to trunked operation. 1.9.5.6 SmartZone Features ❖ Automatic Site Registration/Deregistration — SmartZone ASTRO Digital Spectra radios automatically send in their unit IDs and current mode selections upon power up,power down, site roaming, talkgroup changes and on exiting emergency operation. This enables the zone controller to monitor the affiliation of the radio at all times. ❖ Automatic Site Switching— SmartZone capable ASTRO Digital Spectra radios use Received Signal Strength Indication (RSSI) to determine whether the radio should switch automatically to another site. •I• Busy Override—When a talkgroup call is placed in a SmartZone system and the system is not able to obtain voice channels at all necessary sites, a busy tone will be generated. If so programmed in the zone manager and through RSS, you may override this busy with Busy Override. The talkgroup call will then be processed at all sites that have voice channels available. Busy sites will be added to the call as channels become available. •b Preferred Site—ASTRO Digital Spectra SmartZone radios can be programmed to view certain sites to be preferred, always preferred, least preferred or no preference. This provides the system manager the flexibility to keep a radio on a particular site, regardless of the presence of a stronger signal from another site. C�M000000000 Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 1 ❖ 96 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 1 ❖ SYSTEM DESCRIPTION • Full Spectrum Scan — The ASTRO Digital Spectra Mobile radio is capable of SmartZone full spectrum scan. This feature allows the radio to scan all frequencies for a control channel within the band range in additional to those frequencies that are pre-programmed via the RSS. This feature reduces the possibility of NOT being able to find all possible operating channels. Another advantage is when additional system capability(with new frequencies) is added. With full spectrum scan, radios do not have to be reprogrammed. + Site Lock/Site Change—This feature allows your radio to lock onto a specific site and not roam among wide-area talkgroup sites. This is particularly useful when operating at the fringe of a system's coverage area. The Site Search Button can be used to manually force the radio to change to a new siite. 1.9.5.7 Accessories + Spare Accessory Group—The spare accessory group consists of a speaker, microphone, hang-up clip, antenna, power cable kit, and mounting hardware. These accessories come in high power/remote mount configurations, as well as mid power/dash mount and remote mount configurations. + Spare Remote Mount Control Heads—The spare remote mount control head consists of an ASTRO Digital Spectra control head in a remote mount configuration along with the appropriate buttons for all currently available features and mounting hardware. No power or control cables are included. Spare remote mount control heads are available for all models. + Control Station Accessories —A control station power supply, power cable, and tray can be ordered for control station configurations. M°MOTOROLA Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 1 4 97 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 1 • SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 1.9.5.8 Other Options Other available options consist of remote mounting kits, microphones, DEK (Direct Entry Keypad) modules, siren/PA kits with various speakers, and others. Table 2: Features& Benefits Chart Features Benefits Digital Capability Capable of both analog and digital ASTRO CAI operations Multiple System Configurations Provides users with the flexibility of both conventional and trunked features. Dual Mode Operation Allows users to access both trunked and conventional systems without loss of important capabilities, thereby extending the range of communications outside the trunked system. Feature operation has been integrated to simplify usage between conventional and trunked systems. Field Programmable Allows the radio to adapt as the communications needs grow and change. FLASHport Capability Provides user with the ability to change, expand, and modify radio features and capabilities Repeater Talk-Around Provides the ability to communicate directly with others when out of range of the trunking system. Status Tones The user always knows what the radio and radio system are informing him of by listening to the distinctive audible tones. Scan Operation Allows the user to monitor different conventional and trunked modes without changing the mode-select switch. PTT-ID Allows the radio to generate their ID so that dispatch can identify the radio caller Emergency Emergency alerting capability is used to inform dispatch personal of a life threatening situation Private Conversation Allows user to selectively call an individual radio. Telephone Interconnect Provides user the ability to place or receive phone calls Selective Radio Inhibit Ensures that unauthorized users can't monitor or interrupt the system. ®Morowosn Attachment B-3/13/2000 Section 1 •:• 98 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 1 ❖SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 1.9.5.9 ASTRO Digital Spectra Summary The ASTRO Spectra Mobile radios are the most versatile offered by Motorola. In order to meet the varying requirements of our different customers the ASTRO Spectra Mobile radio may be configured with just the right combination of hardware, and software to meet specific needs. The ASTRO Spectra Mobile is capable of operation in Conventional systems, as well as SMARTNET and SmartZone trunked systems. In each system type, the Spectra is capable of operation in an analog, or digital mode, and is capable of supporting either narrowband 12.5 kHz, or 25 kHz channels. This ability to work with many types of systems provides the utmost flexibility for those customers who require a wide level of system solutions to meet their communications needs. The ASTRO Spectra Mobile may be purchased with software for operation in conventional systems, trunked systems such as SMARTNET, or wide area trunked systems such as SmartZone. With each of these software packages, a wide range of features are provided consistent with the system type. For example, the conventional software supports features such as Unit ID, scan, and encryption. The SMARTNET and SmartZone software provides these features, plus trunked operation, along with such features as Dynamic Regrouping, Selective Radio Inhibit, and in wide area systems, automatic roaming. The Spectra is ASTRO digital capable and Project 25 CAI compliant, thus allowing customers to migrate from the most basic conventional two-way system to advanced conventional and trunking systems. When the ASTRO Spectra Mobile hardware platform is combined with the flexibility provided by FLASHport, you are purchasing a unit that provides you the ability to migrate and integrate into today's and tomorrow's communications systems. 1.10 MOSCAD FAULT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM A very important subsystem included in Motorola's proposal to the County is the MOSCAD Fault Management System. MOSCAD is the name of a family of products from Motorola that are used primarily in alarm and control systems. MOSC AD systems are used in a wide variety of system applications, including SCADA, alarm monitoring, and remote control. 1.10.1 Overview The County's ASTRO SmartZone system will be very complex with many key sub- components. In today's complex radio environment, a system failure can spell disaster for a Public Safety Officer or other key personnel. Never has the need been greater to (MOTOROLA Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 1 ❖ 99 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 1 ❖ SYSTEM DESCRIPTION determine, isolate, and correct communications system failures in the shortest time possible. This in itself can be quite a challenge. To meet the requirements set forth in the Request for Proposal, Motorola is proposing as an option a MOSCAD Fault Management System expansion which will monitor the IntelliRepeaters in the County's ASTRO SmartZone system. Also, at each new radio site, the MOSCAD system will provide 60 closure inputs for external site alarms and will provide 16 closure outputs for such items as remotely starting the generator at a site. In addition, the MOSCAD Fault Management System is capable of interfacing to the following equipment. ❖ TeNSr Channel Banks ❖ Ambassador Electronics Banks By monitoring all these key subsystems, service personnel will know of a problem quickly—often before it becomes a major issue. The three main components of a MOSCAD Fault Management System are Master Central, Front End Processor(FEP), and Remote Terminal Unit (RTU). The Central, FEP, and RTU(s) constitute the skeleton of a MOSCAD system. The following drawing shows typical components of MOSCAD Fault Management. C)MOTOROLA Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 1 ❖ 100 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 1 ❖SYSTEM DESCRIPTION MOSCAD Central MOSCAD Front End DI U's Banks Channel 1I Com-1 \ ,; RS-232 IP 2Kbps Aladin Processor (FEP) ti GPS Rx i - ComP Various Discrete TeN5r Alarm Channel ____... Contacts) Banks Central Site Central Site Equipment Remote Sites \ Cha \ Channel Banks MOSCAD Remote Communication Backbone Terminal Units (RTU's) Remote Site A Equipment1 1\ \ —Quantar - v_ y - y ASTROTA TeNSr Various Base Comp. Channel GPS Rx Discrete Stations _ _ Banks _ _ _ __Alarm Contacts Figure 21: MOSCAD Fault Management OM0T0R0LA Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 1 • 101 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 1 ❖SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 1.10.2 General MOSCAD Features Some of the distinct advantages of the Motorola MOSCAD system are described in the paragraphs that follow. All are standard MOSCAD product and system features. ❖ MDLC Protocol—MOSCAD uses the MDLC protocol, a highly sophisticated communication protocol that is based on the Open System Interconnection (OSI) model recommended by the International Organization for Standardization(ISO). This protocol is designed for optimal operation iin data systems with diverse communications media such as radio, RS-232, RS-485, and LAN. Store and Forward—MOSCAD incorporates a store and forward capability that allows any system RTU to become an intelligent tandem processing node to provide optimum use of the existing communications network. ❖ Contention Reporting—MOSCAD takes advantage of contention reporting for true "change of state"operation. Alarms may be reported as soon as they occur without having to wait for the next polling cycle. C• Remote Programming—MOSCAD may be programmed either locally by direct cable connection or remotely from any other MOSCAD RTU in the system. Remote programming will eliminate the need to travel to the site. ❖ Modular Input/Output--MOSCAD offers large selection and capacity of Input/Output modules to meet the needs of virtually any application. •• Direct Connection to IntelliRepeater Stations—MOSCAD allows for the monitoring and diagnostics of IntelliRepeater stations through a serial connection. This feature allows the operator to individually select every IntelliRepeater in the ASTRO SmartZone system. ❖ Direct Connection to TeNSr Channel Banks —MOSCAD is capable of allowing monitoring and diagnostics of TeNSr channel banks through a serial connection. This feature allows the operator to individually select every TeNSr channel bank in the ASTRO SmartZone system. ❖ Communications Redundancy—MOSCAD is capable of allowing for optional link redundancy. The MOSCAD RTU can be configured with a secondary communications path(i.e., radio or fiber—optic)to the Central. Should the primary link fail, the MOSCAD system can automatically route data over the path. C)MOTOROLA Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 1 ❖ 102 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 1 ❖ SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 1.10.3 Overview of MOSCAD Master Central The Graphic Master Central (GMC) is a Windows-based PC with a graphical user interface (GUI) software package through which the entire MOSCAD system can be viewed and controlled. The GMC connects to the MOSCAD system via a collocated MOSCAD FEP. ModBus protocol running at 19.2 kbps is the RS-232 communication protocol between the FEP and the GMC. The graphic display and database are based. on the WonderWare/InTouch Windows application. This software package resides on each GMC. The custom graphic screens show current system status where the user can easily navigate from a macroscopic system view down to the individual site details. All system alarms, Change of States (COS), and controls are timed stamped, stored in the alarm history file, and printed for hard copy keeping. History files allow for retrieval of important information at all times. Security on the GMC will be based on a user's login name and password. These functions are provided with the WonderWare InTouch® software package and will be implemented based on a list of users and access levels. When no user is logged on, no information will be displayed on the screen and no controls will be able to be sent. The GMC is capable of having up to two printers connected to the computer; one for printing all alarms and the other for various custom reports defined by County Personnel. The alarms print out at the time the alarm is detected by the central. Logon/Logoff information is also reported on the printer allocated for alarm printing. The GMC will be programmed to provide several layers of screen depending on the preference of the County. The first layer will typically consist of a single operator screen called a System Overview Screen. The information is in tabular or amp form showing the site locations and is push button selectable. The second screen layer will typically display an individual site in tabular/graphic form and again is push button selectable. A third layer of screens will be the individual site component itself (IntelliRepeater, TeNSr, etc.), showing all status information for the particular system component. A final layer would break down the "other" site alarms. A System Health Screen will also be provided to give MOSCAD system related status information such as internal RTU Status. A MOSCAD FEP is required for each Master Central. The FEP is an application specific device dedicated to RTU interrogation and to the routing of data messages to/from the Central(s) as well as maintaining a real-time database of the MOSCAD system. The FEP I interfaced to the communications system via a TeNSr SRU port. MOSCAD will communicate over the backbone using the MOSCAD's seven layer protocol operating at up to 9.6 kbps. This FEP will be expanded to accommodate the additional equipment that the County is adding to the system 0 Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 1 :• 103 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 1 • SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 1.10.3.1 MOSCAD Remote Terminal Unit The MOSCAD RTU is responsible for monitoring field devices/equipment such as IntelliRepeater stations, TeNSr channel banks, and other site support equipment. Depending on the site alarm density for status and control points, the RTU may consist of multiple panels. The MOSCAD RTU consists of a single series 400 CPU housed in a 19" rack mount, with a DC to DC converter, and one of four 8-slot motherboard configurations. Both the IntelliRepeater stations, and the TeNSr channel banks, status as well as control functions, are supported through a digital (RS-232) connection to the respective devices. The obvious benefits of this connection include decreased costs (no need for external I/O modules), little or no wiring, and decreased documentation efforts. Also, far more information is obtained than the old "contact closure"type of alarm connection. 1.10.3.2 IntelliRepeater Interface Summary via RS-232 The MOSCAD CPU will interface to the IntelliRepeater station via the RSS port. Each MOSCAD CPU will interface to up to eight (8) IntelliRepeater stations via an RS-232 mux. The IntelliRepeater interface software in the MOSCAD will poll each attached IntelliRepeater continuously for the most critical information, including: ❖ Full power status (Full or Low or Inactive) ❖ Forward power(in watts, integer) ❖ Reflected power(in watts, integer) • VSWR (ratio of forward to reflected power, as calculated by the IntelliRepeater integer) Once every three minutes, the IntelliRepeater will be placed in to what is called the Front Panel Mode (FPM), where a complete dump of its current operating status will be retrieved. The IntelliRepeater station remains 100% operational while the station is in FPM. Information retrieved while in the FPM includes: + Time stamp of the station clock (updated every 5 seconds) ❖ Current channel status (1 to n) ✓ Power line status (on or off) •I• Power line failure status (normal or fail) EM)MoronaoLA Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 1 C. 104 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 1 ❖SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Station Control Module status (normal or fail) ❖ PA Diagnostics status (normal or fail) •3 PA test status (on or off) •8 Receiver Diagnostics status (normal or fail) ❖ Receiver status (active or inactive) ❖ Receiver synthesizer status (lock or unlock) •3 Transmitter synthesizer status (lock or unlock) • Wireline diagnostics status (normal or fail) Available IntelliRepeater control commands: ❖ Access disable (on or off) • Select channel (1 to n) ❖ Set PTT (key or dekey) ❖ Set PA test mode (on or off) 1.10.3.3 External (Environmental) Status Points In addition to the IntelliRepeater and TeNSr diagnostic information, the MOSCAD system provided for the County can support local status indication from the sites themselves. Status information such as shelter ingress/egress, temperature and humidity, and fire and smoke can be provided back to the central computer. Each site is capable, with options, of monitoring a maximum of 128 external digital inputs, 16 external digital outputs, and 16 external analog inputs. TeNSr Alarm Interface Summary via RS-232 Capability Motorola has integrated alarm reporting of the TeNSr channel banks into the MOSCAD Fault Management System. Integrating this and other third party devices is made possible through a flexible and modular MOSCAD solution. One MOSCAD Series 400 CPU can support two TeNSr devices. The MOSCAD can connect to each TeNSr channel bank via its alarm port and will require a dedicated MOSCAD RS-232 port. The MOSCAD would be in a"listen-only"mode, where it would continuously monitor for any alarm messages that the TeNSr channel bank OMOTOROtat Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 1 C• 105 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 1 6• SYSTEM DESCRIPTION transmits. Alarm messages would then be converted to native MOSCAD data format for transmission to the Master at the Master Site. The following alarms may be individually monitored on each TeNSr card by the MOSCAD: ❖ Out of service ❖ No signal (incoming WAN signal lost) ❖ Loss of synchronization (frame alignment lost—DS1) ❖ Alarm information signal (remote device failure) ❖ Carrier group alarm ❖ Excessive error rate (WAN threshold) d• Alarm cutoff(must clear alarm) 1.10.4 Summary Many advantages of the MOSCAD solution have been outlined. One of the main advantages of the MOSCAD solution is the ability to bring all of the system alarm information, IntelliRepeater status, TeNSr status, as well as environmental alarms to a single operator interface. The digital interface to IntelliRepeater and the TeNSr channel banks allow the elimination of extensive(and costly) interconnection and documentation. The interfaces are greatly simplified eliminating any chance or wiring errors. The MOSCAD approach allows for the seamless integration of alarm information to a single operator interface. CMADMOTOROLA Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 1 ❖ 106 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 1 ❖SYSTEM DESCRIPTION transmits. Alarm messages would then be converted to native MOSCAD data format for transmission to the Master at the Master Site. The following alarms may be individually monitored on each TeNSr card by the MOSCAD: ❖ Out of service 6• No signal (incoming WAN signal lost) • Loss of synchronization (frame alignment lost—DS1) ❖ Alarm information signal (remote device failure) • Carrier group alarm ❖ Excessive error rate (WAN threshold) ❖ Alarm cutoff(must clear alarm) 1.10.4 Summary Many advantages of the MOSCAD solution have been outlined. One of the main advantages of the MOSCAD solution is the ability to bring all of the system alarm information, IntelliRepeater status, TeNSr status, as well as environmental alarms to a single operator interface. The digital interface to IntelliRepeater and the TeNSr channel banks allow the elimination of extensive (and costly) interconnection and documentation. The interfaces are greatly simplified eliminating any chance or wiring errors. The MOSCAD approach allows for the seamless integration of alarm information to a single operator interface. CAAMoronoLA Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 1 ❖ 106 Confidential and Proprietary Section 2 Phase I Acceptance Test Plan Weld County SmartZone System TABLE OF CONTENTS 2. ACCEPTANCE TEST PLAN 1 2.1 STAGING ACCEPTANCE TEST PLAN 1 2.2 ATP TEST DOCUMENTATION 2 2.3 SITE ACCEPTANCE TEST PLAN 2 2.3.1 "Punch List"Procedure 2 2.4 COVERAGE ACCEPTANCE TEST PLAN 3 2.4.1 Overview 3 2.4.2 Development of CATP 3 2.4.3 Areas Excluded From Coverage Testing 3 2.4.4 Coverage Acceptance Criteria 3 2.4.5 Coverage Acceptance Test Plan Methodology 4 2.4.6 Coverage Test Prerequisites and Preparation 5 2.4.7 Coverage Test Equipment 6 2.4.8 Coverage Testing Procedure 7 2.4.9 Analyzing Data and Generating Reports 8 2.5 SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE TEST PLAN 8 2.5.2 Final System Acceptance 10 2.5.3 Certificate of System Acceptance 11 Attatchment "A" 13 Sample Trunking Features and System Tests 13 CENTRACOM Elite Consoles 21 Network Management System 41 Radio Control Manager 44 Security Management 45 Failure Scenarios 46 Attatchment "B" ¶0 MOMoronoLA Attachment B--3/13/2000 Table of Contents ❖ i Confidential and Proprietary 2. ACCEPTANCE TEST PLAN The Acceptance Test Plan (ATP) is designed to verify that each subsystem meets all the requirements of the specification and will specifically address the areas of radio coverage, system operational tests, reliability, and system functional tests. The ATP format was developed based on the evolution of project management techniques and Motorola's long involvement in the system implementation process. The Acceptance Test Plan consists of four separate acceptance tests: (1) Staging (2) Site (3) Coverage (4) System Upon successful completion of the four Acceptance Tests the system will be deemed finally accepted. Following execution of the contract, Motorola and Weld County will review the ATP and make any mutually agreed modifications to it. This review will be completed no later than sixty(60) days following contract execution. All agreed modifications to the ATP will be documented in a revised ATP, which will become an integral part of the contract. 2.1 STAGING ACCEPTANCE TEST PLAN This Phase of the Weld County system build-out plan will consist of adding new sites to an existing system. The new sites will be staged and tested to operate in the "Site Trunking" mode. It will not be necessary for Weld County to witness this testing since the stand alone sites will not display all of the features that Weld County will see in when the system is constructed in the field. The test plan for CCSI will, therefore, consist of the following: •• Motorola Customer Center for System Integration (CCSI) will construct and test two sites equipped with MOSCAD alarming. • CCSI will test the "Site Trunking" features and document the successful testing of these features. d• Upon the successful testing of the "Site Trunking" features, CCSI will ship the two sites to the field. OMorono&A Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 2 :• 1 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 2 ❖ACCEPTANCE TEST PLAN 2.2 ATP TEST DOCUMENTATION A document similar to the Attachment "A" will be used to test the sites at CCSI and for the final system test. Since the sites will be tested in ""Site Trunking"" mode at CCSI, not all of the tests can be performed. The remainder of the tests will be performed after the system is install and optimized and deemed ready for use. 2.3 SITE ACCEPTANCE TEST PLAN The following procedures will be utilized during the site ATPs: ❖ All equipment on site will be inventoried. This information will be recorded and included in the system documentation. ❖ Motorola will perform Fixed Network Equipment (FNE) quality audits on all sites, utilizing Motorola's R56 standards. A copy of the audit will be provided to the customer along with any recommendations for the customer to improve items under their control. ❖ Motorola will verify that site installations are performed in accordance with the Statement of Work. ❖ Each site must be optimized and tested for the system to perform properly. Site testing is performed after the equipment is installed at the site and optimization is complete. The test results will be recorded on forms included in Attachment "B". The completed forms will become part of the system documentation. During optimization, a record of site equipment readings will be maintained. As part of site acceptance, these readings will be spot checked by Weld County. This information will also be included in the as-built documentation. If a failure is encountered during the test, Motorola will take corrective action. Failure or deficiencies requiring corrective action, which are not resolved during the testing process, will be tracked on a punch list. Motorola will coordinate the punch list resolution with Weld County. 2'.3.1 "Punch List" Procedure For each Failure,Non-compliance, or Out-of-Specification item that is found, a detailed explanation of the item will be recorded as a Punch List Item. The Site, Model No. (if applicable), Serial No. (if applicable), Test No., Test Checklist ID (if applicable), Date, Target completion Date (if applicable), and the Exception Procedure Code must be filled out for each Punch List Item. The Weld County and Motorola representatives must initial all Punch List Items. (M)Moronoas Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 2 :• 2 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 2 ❖ACCEPTANCE TEST PLAN 2.4 COVERAGE ACCEPTANCE TEST PLAN 2.4.1 Overview This Coverage Acceptance Test Plan (CATP) is designed to verify that the voice radio system implemented by Motorola meets or exceeds the required coverage reliability within Weld County's service area as indicated on Motorola's coverage maps. The CATP defines the coverage testing method and procedure, the coverage acceptance criteria, the test documentation, and the responsibilities of both Motorola and Weld County. 2.4.2 Development of CATP The Coverage Acceptance Test Plan was developed for Motorola customers as a thorough and systematic coverage testing procedure with defined methodologies and procedures. The test plan will consist of development of a test grid layout that is consistent with the area of predicted coverage. Weld County will review the test plan. Upon acceptance of the plan coverage testing will commence. 2.4.3 Areas Excluded From Coverage Testing Certain portions of the area of predicted coverage will not be tested. These areas will be excluded on the basis that they are: ❖ Inaccessible due to lack of paved public road access 9 Federal Government property or bases ❖ Outside the predicted coverage area • All testing will be performed using mobile mounted test equipment. This test will does not include any "on foot" testing. 2.4.4 Coverage Acceptance Criteria The acceptance criteria will be based on the demonstration that the required percentage of the test grids yield a Bit Error Rate (BER)value of 2.6%, providing delivered audio quality DAQ-3.0, available at the receiver. A test grid may be passed in any of three ways: ❖ It will pass if the BER test passes ❖ It will pass if the subjective audio quality test passes OMoroaoLA Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 2 •:• 3 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 2 ❖ACCEPTANCE TEST PLAN ❖ Any grid which is shown on the coverage maps as being covered but not accessible for testing will be considered a pass If the following percentage of the grids within the contour of each coverage map pass, then the coverage for that subsystem will be declared passed. 24.4.1 Percentage of Reliability Coverage prediction maps have been provided to Weld County to assist in the site selection process. These maps were prepared at the 95% level. This constitutes the criteria for coverage acceptance for the proposed subsystem. Five percent of the grids predicted to have coverage may fail the coverage acceptance test plan. Failed grids may have any distribution throughout the coverage area of the site. Weld County will have the option to accept the coverage at any time prior to the completion of the testing of a site or the Coverage Acceptance Test. The combined effort between Motorola and Weld County will ensure a complete and accurate understanding of the testing results. The acceptance by Weld County of the mobile coverage of each site and portable In- Street coverage of each site will in total constitute System Coverage Acceptance. 2.4.5 Coverage Acceptance Test Plan Methodology sm A quantitative method of measurement, called FACTWare (Fully Automated Coverage Test), will be used to test radio system coverage. This test package involves the use of multiple calibrated test receivers, a Global Positioning Satellite (GF'S) Receiver and a portable computer. This method allows a high rate of sampling and automated recording of the BER measurements. Each site's coverage test area will be subdivided into a uniform pattern of test grids distributed over the coverage area in which one sample per grid will be taken. There will be a sufficient number of test grids to provide a statistically valid sample size to demonstrate the specified reliability. Motorola will calculate the required number of test grids for each site. The grid quantity calculation will be based upon the coverage reliability guaranteed to Weld County. The maximum grid size shall be a geographical area not to exceed 1 km square for any site's coverage test area. Grid size may vary between the different site coverage test areas in the system, but will not vary within given sites' coverage test area. Grids within the general boundary of the coverage area that are partially non- covered may be tested but the test must be conducted within the covered portion of the grid. C)MOTOROLA Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 2 ❖ 4 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 2 ❖ACCEPTANCE TEST PLAN Coverage will be evaluated based upon receiver BER value measurements acquired by the calibrated measurement equipment. During the field test, the Motorola supplied receiver package will be placed in a vehicle that will travel to each of the test grids. At each test location, outbound BER measurements will be captured and stored by the calibrated measurement equipment while the vehicle is moving. The hardware configurations will be such that the portable test will use an agreed to attenuation pad (calculated additional dB loss) to compensate for the less efficient portable antenna. Both Motorola and Weld County will agree upon the antenna loss figure to use prior to conducting the field tests. Motorola will conduct this test only once unless the test is found to be unreliable because of equipment malfunction or failure. Motorola will re-conduct the portion of the test affected by the equipment malfunction or failure. Motorola will have the option to perform subjective audio quality testing within any failed grid based on Audio Quality evaluations performed by a field team composed of Weld County and Motorola representatives. Test grids, which pass the subjective audio quality test, will be counted as passing just as if it had passed during the BER test. 2.4.6 Coverage Test Prerequisites and Preparation Weld County and Motorola shall agree on the number of test vehicles and the test schedule well in advance of the commencement of testing to allow adequate preparation by both parties. Team members shall be assigned in advance and trained in the test procedures. Each test team shall consist of at least two people: a Weld County representative and a Motorola representative. Weld County shall supply the test vehicles and a test team member for each vehicle. The test vehicle shall be of sufficient size to carry the team members and all the required test equipment in a safe manner. The test team representatives shall consist of a driver and at least one person to oversee the testing procedure. The driver and the overseer may be the same person. Motorola will provide the FACTWare calibrated measurement equipment for each vehicle and a test team representative. The test team representatives will conduct the test and operate the test equipment. Several days prior to the commencement of the test, the test equipment shall be installed in the test vehicle and thoroughly checked out, and all representatives shall be trained in the test procedure. FACTWare test grids of an area shall be prepared several days in advance for examination. Any grid that is not wholly within the OMoronoLA Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 2 C. 5 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 2 ❖ACCEPTANCE TEST PLAN coverage area shall be noted. Motorola and Weld County will mutually agree upon the days and times of testing prior to testing. If any subjective audio quality testing is determined to be necessary, a vehicle and a driver supplied by Weld County will be utilized. The field audio quality test team shall consist of at least three representatives from Weld County and an equal number of Motorola representatives. The team members shall be trained and certified to evaluate audio quality by delivered Audio Quality. Also, a dispatcher may be assigned to provide predefined transmit audio test messages from the appropriate dispatch facility to the team in the field. 2.4.7 Coverage Test Equipment A FACTWare computer based test platform will be provided by Motorola for each of the test vehicles. The FACTWare test package includes one or more calibrated test receiver and mobile antenna for sampling the RF signal, a Global Positioning Satellite (GPS) Receiver for instantaneous location information and a portable computer to automatically conduct the test and store the results. After each site is tested, the stored data will be retrieved from the computer, analyzed, and summaries will be printed. The FACTWare package allows two modes of sampling: Automatic and Manual. In the automatic mode, a quasi-random method of selecting evenly and uniformly distributed test locations will be performed by FACTWare. When the computer detects that the vehicle has entered an untested grid based on information from the GPS Receiver and stored grid information, it will issue a command to the receiver to sample the transmission from the subsystem's transmitter. The receiver will evaluate the sample and provide a BER number to the computer which will provide a display of the results to the operator and store the information on disk along with the location information from the GPS Receiver. In the manual mode of FACTWare, an Operator will be required to make the decision of where and when the BER sampling will take place. The manual mode may be used in the event of loss of GPS synchronization or coverage, or to force a test sample in a particular location within a grid. If the manual mode is to be used, an agreement between the Motorola and Weld County representatives will be made on where to take a BER measurement. The default test location is the approximate center of the grid provided that it is within the RF coverage area. A BER measurement will be determined by sampling data over a distance of 410 wavelengths. The average of these measurements will be computed to determine a BER representative of the test location. An average of multiple samples is used rather than a single measurement to ensure that the measurement is not biased by taking a single sample that might be at a peak or null point on the radio wave. The resulting average will be referred to as the"Grid BER". (&MOTOROLA Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 2 C. 6 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 2 ❖ACCEPTANCE TEST PLAN 2.4.8 Coverage Testing Procedure Three tests will be conducted simultaneously. They are Mobile, Portable In-Street Coverage Test and Portable In-Building. The test procedure is the same for all tests, and the Pass/Fail criteria will differ by a calculated dB loss factor to be used for Portable antenna losses and the building penetration loss. 1) A FACTWare computer based test platform will be provided by Motorola for each of the test vehicles and will gather BER data which will be stored and analyzed. The results will be immediately available and summary results will be printed at a later date. 2) The test team shall program the FACTWare radios for the frequencies involved in testing and verify proper operation of the equipment, then drive to the beginning point of that day's route. 3) As the vehicle moves through each test grid, a BER sample will be taken and the results will be displayed. The sample will normally be triggered automatically by the GPS receiver. In some instances it may be necessary for the operator to manually initiate the sample. 4) If the Grid BER is equal to or better than the value required to provide DAQ-3 audio, that grid for that configuration will be declared passed. If the Grid BER will provide less than DAQ-3 audio, the grid for that configuration will be declared failed. 5) If any grid fails the BER test as described above, Motorola may elect to perform a subjective test to evaluate audio quality in the failed grid. The subjective test will be conducted by the field audio quality team. This subjective test team should listen to an agreed upon five to ten second message while driving through the grid which failed the BER test. The team should evaluate the received audio quality in this grid in accordance with the Industry Standard delivered Audio Quality chart found below: Table 3: Delivered Audio Quality Delivered Audio Performance Description Audio Quality (DAQ) 5 Speech easily understood with no background noise. 4.5 Speech easily understood with infrequent noise/distortion. 4 Speech easily understood with occasional noise/distortion. 3.4 Speech understandable without repetition. Some noise/distortion. I MOMoroaoLA Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 2 •: 7 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 2 ❖ACCEPTANCE TEST PLAN Delivered Audio Performance Description Audio Quality (DAQ) 3 Speech easily understandable with slight effort. Occasional repetition required due to noise/distortion. 2 Speech easily understandable with considerable effort. Frequent repetition due to noise/distortion. 1 Unusable, speech present but unreadable. 6) If the mean of the subjective evaluations of the majority of the members of the audio quality test team equals or exceeds Digital Audio Quality 3 for a grid, that grid will be declared passed. 7) The combined total of grids passing the BER test and grids passing the subjective audio quality test will contribute toward passing the coverage requirement. 2.4.9 Analyzing Data and Generating Reports During the coverage acceptance test, FACTWare computer files are generated which include the BER averages for each test location by site. This data will be placed in a software spreadsheet during the analysis phase and summaries will be compiled. During any subjective Audio Quality field tests, a log will be kept by each member of the field test team. This list will include the exact location of each test, the time of the test, the date of the test, the members of the field test team, the DAQ value assigned to each field test location, the average Circuit Merit value for each test location, and any other pertinent information. A report outlining the test and test results will be submitted to Weld County by Motorola. Weld County and Motorola will agree on the time frame for the report submission. This report will include a form, which is to be signed by both Weld County and Motorola indicating the acceptance of the coverage provided by the 800 MHz radio sites which have been tested. A sample of such a form follows, showing coverage acceptance. Coverage Acceptance of all voice radio sites will constitute Final System Coverage Acceptance by Weld County for the 800 MHz Radio System. 2.5 SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE TEST PLAN The System Acceptance Test will describe the procedures that will be used to demonstrate that the trunked system provides functional performance. The successful C)M Attachment e--3/13/2000 Section 2 ❖ 8 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 2 ❖ACCEPTANCE TEST PLAN completion of the System Acceptance Test will constitute acceptance of the Motorola provided hardware and software. Because some of the system features could not be tested at CCSI the wide area features of the system will need to be tested in the field. The System Test form shown in Attachment "A" will again be used. Again. some of the test will not be conducted in this phase as there is not Successful completion of the System ATP will be indicated by the completion and signing of the System Acceptance Test Form. 2.5.1.1 Specifications and Methods Successful Functional Testing requires that the new sites are linked to the system and fully operational. It is necessary for all involved parties to be available to participate in the Testing. The System Manager must not allow any part of the system to be disabled during Functional Testing. Motorola will perform a functional test on equipment delivered and installed as part of Weld County Phase 1 System. Any site link and telephone lines provided by Weld County must meet the specifications outlined in the Statement of Work for satisfactory operation of the equipment. If these specifications are not maintained, Motorola will not be responsible for system performance and system performance may be detrimentally effected. 1) A system functional test will be performed to verify that the system is operating as designed once the system is completely installed in the field. This functional test will be the same test performed in the Staging Acceptance Test with the exception that the Failure scenarios will not be repeated. °MOTOROLA Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 2 :• 9 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 2 ❖ACCEPTANCE TEST PLAN 2.5.2 Final System Acceptance Following completion of the four ATP components (Staging, Site, Coverage and System ATPs). Completion of the operational test will constitute Final System Acceptance. Site Name: The undersigned, a representative of Weld County, accepts the Radio Frequency Coverage of the above named Subsystem. Signed (Weld County Representative) Date Signed(Motorola Representative) Date CM4noronoLA Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 2 •:• 10 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 2 ❖ACCEPTANCE TEST PLAN 2.5.3 Certificate of System Acceptance Certificate-of System Acceptance Customer Name: Weld County Project Name: 800 MHz ASTRO 3.0 SmartZone System agrees that all major provisions of the project provided by Motorola are complete and ready for the use intended, except for any minor defects and/or punchlist items noted below: The items listed below will be corrected by Motorola: Item Description 1.) 2.) 3.) n No defects or punchlist is applicable. This agreement documents the start of the warranty on , and authorizes Motorola to bill for the remaining value of the contract, and it indicates the agreement to make final payment. Weld County: Motorola Representative: Print Full Name Print Full Name Title Title Signature Signature Date Date All punchlist items noted on this document are complete. Weld County Motorola Representative: Print Full Name Print Full Name Title Title Signature Signature Date Date OMOTOROLA Attachment B 3/13/2000 Section 2 :• 11 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 2 ••ACCEPTANCE TEST PLAN Attatchment "A" Sample Trunking Features and System Tests Talkgroup Call The talkgroup call is the primary level of organization for communications on a trunked radio system. Radios with talkgroup call capability will be able to communicate with other members of the same talkgroup. This provides the effect of a private channel down to the talkgroup level. This test will demonstrate that a talkgroup transmission initiated by a radio user will only be heard by system users who have the same talkgroup selected. It will be performed in an Interzone basis. Setup (same site) Four radios, each capable of performing calls on two unique talkgroups, are required to perform this test (radios 1, 2, 3, and 4). This test requires that each of the radios are affiliated onto the same site. Set radios 1 and 3 to talkgroup A, and radios 2 and 4 to talkgroup B. Test (same site) Step 1: While the system is in Wide Area operation, verify that each of the 4 radios involved in the test is affiliated to the same site. Step 2: Initiate a wide area call with radio 1 in talkgroup A. Step 3: Observe that only radio 3 will be able to monitor and respond to the call. Step 4: Initiate a wide area call with radio 2. Step 5: Observe that only radio 4 will be able to monitor and respond to the call. OMo-rosinA Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 2 ❖ 13 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 2 ❖ACCEPTANCE TEST PLAN Setup (across sites within a zone) Four radios, each capable of performing calls on two unique talkgroups, are required to perform this test (radios 1, 2, 3, and 4). This test requires radios 1 and 2 to be affiliated on site #1 and radios 3 and 4 to be affiliated on site#2. Set radios 1 and 3 on talkgroup A, and radios 2 and 4 on talkgroup B. Test (across sites within a zone) Step 1: While the system is in Wide Area operation, verify that radios 1 and 2 are affiliated on site#1 and radios 3 and 4 are affiliated on site#2. Step 2: Initiate a wide area call with radio 1 in talkgroup A. Step 3: Observe that only radio 3 will be able to monitor and respond to the call. Step 4: Initiate a wide area call with radio 2. Step 5: Observe that only radio 4 will be able to monitor and respond to the call. Notes/Comments (9MOTOROLA Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 2 ❖ 14 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 2 ❖ACCEPTANCE TEST PLAN Busy Queuing and Call Back If a radio user depresses the push-to-talk(PTT) while all the system channels are in use, a series of busy tones will be heard until a channel is assigned, or until the PTT is released. For convenience, any users requesting system access during a busy period will be put in a queue on a FIFO(first-in,first-out)basis. When a channel does become available, the system will notify the first user by "calling back".A talk permit tone alerts the radio user of the call back. This feature allows the radio user to depress the PTT button once and wait for the call back, instead of continuously keying, in an effort to gain a voice channel. This test will demonstrate the busy queuing and call back features of the system. Test Step 1: For demonstration purposes, choose radios and talkgroups that are all set to the same priority level. Step 2: Disable all but one voice channel. Step 3: Press the PTT of a subscriber unit from talkgroup A and hold the PTT key. This will capture the remaining voice channel in the system. Step 4: Key a radio from talkgroup B, and then key a radio from talkgroup C. Both radios should receive a busy tone. Step 5: Release the PTT key of the talkgroup A radio. The talkgroup B radio will receive a callback tone. Step 6: Release the PTT key of the talkgroup B radio. The talkgroup C radio will receive a callback tone. Step 7: Take a radio, change its priority to a higher level and repeat the above steps. Notes/Comments (DM Attachment 8-3/13/2000 Section 2 ❖ 15 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 2 ❖ACCEPTANCE TEST PLAN Continuous Assignment Updating When a talkgroup is assigned a voice channel, the trunking system controller continues to transmit the channel assignment information on the control channel for as long as the talkgroup is using the channel. This test will demonstrate that a radio which has recently been turned on or entered the service area, will be steered to the appropriate voice channel to join the rest of the talkgroup in the conversation. Setup Set up 3 radios (Radios 1, 2, and 4) on the same talkgroup. Test Step 1: Turn one of the radios in talkgroup A OFF. Step 2: Initiate a talkgroup call using another radio in talkgroup A. Step 3: While the talkgroup call is in progress, turn ON the radio that was previously shut OFF in Step 1. Step 4: Observe that the radio which was just brought back into service joins the talkgroup call already in progress. Notes/Comments (M.Morowo.-n Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 2 •:• 16 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 2 ❖ACCEPTANCE TEST PLAN Talk Prohibit/Out-of-Range This test will demonstrate that a subscriber radio will generate a "Talk Prohibit/Out- of-Range"tone when the trunking system is not accessible or is out of range. Test Step 1: Remove the antenna from a portable radio unit, and ensure that the radio cannot receive the control channel. Step 2: Press the PTT button on the portable radio. Step 3: Observe that a"Talk Prohibit/Out-of-Range" tone is heard on the. subscriber radio. Notes/Comments OMoronoLA Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 2 •2 17 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 2 ❖ACCEPTANCE TEST PLAN PTT-ID The PTT-ID feature provides the capability for a subscriber radio unit in the franked radio system to transmit its individual unit ID on the control channel when the PTT button is pushed. The subscriber radios shall be programmed for PIT-ID trunking. This will allow the radios to begin all transmissions by sending their unit ID on the control channel, even during the repeater hang-time on a talkgroup call. The PTT-ID information (alias of radio unit ID) will be displayed on the following equipment: d• CENTRACOM Elite consoles ❖ Zone Manager Terminals Test Step 1: Key up several subscriber radios in the system. Step 2: Observe that the PTT-IDs are displayed on the Elite consoles and the RCM screen of an Zone Manager Terminal. Step 3: Verify that the PTT-IDs are displayed during the channel hang-time (subscribers programmed for PTT-ID trunking). Step 4: Verify that the PTT-IDs are displayed for both message-trunked and transmission-trunked talkgroups. Notes/Comments C1�M Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 2 C. 18 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 2 ❖ACCEPTANCE TEST PLAN Emergency Call Priority Access The Emergency Alarm and Call feature provides priority access to a voice channel for all subsequent transmissions, after the Emergency Call function is activated by the radio unit. Emergency signaling is transmitted on the control channel. This ensures that all Emergency Calls will be received, even if all of the system voice channels are in use. This test will demonstrate the activation of the Emergency Alarm button on a subscriber radio, verification of the Emergency Alarm that was received, confirmation of the channel assignment priority access, and the extended channel "hang-time" associated with an Emergency Call. Test Step 1: Disable all but one voice channel. Step 2: Press and hold the PTT switch of radio 1 on talkgroup A. Step 3: Press the PTT of radio 2 on talkgroup B. Observe that this radio receives a busy tone. Step 4: Press the Emergency button on radio 3. Observe that the emergency alarm is received at the Police consoles. Step 5: Press PTT on radio 3 to initiate the Emergency Call. Observe that the Emergency Call receives a call back when the first radio dekeys (if Top of Queue is enabled), or the Emergency Call contends with the first radio until it dekeys (Ruthless Preemption enabled). Observe that radio 3's Emergency Call is serviced before any other requests (i.e., radio 2), since it has a higher priority than any other call in the busy queue. Step 6: Observe that the channel assigned for the Emergency Call is "reserved" for the emergency, that is, the channel has an extended hang-time. Step 7: Reset the Emergency Call by pressing and holding the emergency button on the initiating radio. Notes/Comments OMoronos A Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 2 :• 19 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 2 ❖ACCEPTANCE TEST PLAN Encrypted ASTRO Talkgroup Call - (Optional) This test will demonstrate that ASTRO secure transmissions will be heard only on radios equipped with encryption capability and that have been loaded with the identical Digital Encryption Standard- Output Feedback(DES-OFB)encryption key. Test Step 1: Select a talkgroup on two equipped subscriber units. Step 2: Press the PTT button on one of the radios in Step 1. Observe that audio is heard on the second subscriber radio. Step 3: Select "Secure"mode on the subscriber radios. Ensure that these two radios have been loaded with the same key. Step 4: Press the PTT button on one of the radios in Step 3. Observe that audio is heard on the second subscriber radio. Step 5: Load a different key into a third subscriber radio. Verify that this radio will not be able to monitor the encrypted call in Step 4 since it has a different encryption key. Notes/Comments (1M3rwo-rosroLa Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 2 > 20 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 2 ❖ACCEPTANCE TEST PLAN CENTRACOM Elite Consoles Trunked Talkgroup/Conventional Channel Selection This test will demonstrate that all talkgroup and conventional channels at an operator position can be selected, and that selection of a talkgroup or Channel Resource Window(CRW) will automatically de-select the previously selected talkgroup/channel. It will also demonstrate that consoles can participate in ASTRO Digital calls as well as Analog calls. Test Step 1: Access a console operator position Resource folder. Step 2: Select one of the Resource Windows by moving the trackball or mouse cursor to the Resource Window and clicking the Choose Button (Left button). Step 3: Observe that the Resource Window will react to the selection request by changing to a white background with a green border. Step 4: Select other trunked or conventional resources one at a time. Step 5: Verify that the selection of the resource automatically de-selects the last. Notes/Comments MOMo'rowoua Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 2 21 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 2 ❖ACCEPTANCE TEST PLAN Request to Talk (RTT) This test will demonstrate the operation of the Phase 1 Request To Talk(RTT) function using one subscriber radio unit, the applicable Elite dispatch consoles, and the applicable Zone Manager Session (RCM)operating on the Elite console. Test Step 1: Login to Radio Control Manager Session on two Elite terminals within the same Zone. Step 2: Click on Radio Control Manger. Step 3: Move Status Events window to top view. Step 4: Open the Elite Dispatcher application. Step 5: Initiate an RTT by pressing a single button press on the XTS 3000 or a double button press on the ASTRO Spectra mobile radio. Step 6: Verify that the inbound RTT is displayed on all other dispatch terminals attached to the same talkgroup, plus, the RCM is logged into the Zone where the radio is sending the status message. Information such as Radio ID/Alias, talkgroup ID/Alias, message text RTT, number of RTT retries, and a timestamp should be displayed on screen. Verify that an audible tone is heard from the field unit upon the receipt of the RTT by the system. Step 7: Double click with the left mouse button to Respond to the RTT. Step 8: Observe that the RTT displays as being responded to on both Elite terminals. Step 9: Delete the RTT by pressing the right mouse button and selecting `Delete'. Step 10: Observe that the RTT on the second Elite console indicates that it has been deleted (it is grayed out). Notes/Comments (DMoroaos t Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 2 ❖ 22 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 2 ❖ACCEPTANCE TEST PLAN Transmit Audio and VU Meter Operation After a channel or talkgroup CRW has been selected at an operator position, the dispatcher may transmit using either the general transmit button on the CIE(Console Interface Enclosure), the footswitch, or by choosing the "transmit button"on the screen with the mouse. The VU Meter is a bar graph on the CRT interface unit which responds to the dispatcher's voice during transmit operation. This test will demonstrate the console transmit function and the VU meter operation. Test Step 1: Select a talkgroup resource. Step 2: Verify that the resource display indicates the selected talkgroup. Step 3: Depress and hold the General Transmit button on the CIE. Observe that the selected resource indicates a "transmit" status. Step 4: Speak into the microphone in a normal voice. Verify that the VU Meter responds to the voice transmission. Notes/Comments OMOTOROLA Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 2 ❖ 23 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 2 ❖ACCEPTANCE TEST PLAN Footswitch Operation Either of the two treadles on the footswitch may be used to generate a PTT on the selected channel or talkgroup. This test will demonstrate the PTT function using the operator position footswitch. Test Step 1: Select a talkgroup resource. Step 2: Verify that the resource display indicates the selected talkgroup. Step 3: Depress and hold the footswitch. Observe that the selected resource indicates "transmit" status. Step 4: Speak into the microphone in a normal voice. Verify that the VU Meter responds to the voice transmission. Notes/Comments @MOTOROLA Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 2 •: 24 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 2 ❖ACCEPTANCE TEST PLAN Receive Audio, Call Indicator and VU Meter Operation When a call is received on a selected CRW, the word "Call"(or the alias/trunked unit ID) will flash below the CRW name. When a call is received on an unselected CRW, the word "Call"(or the alias/trunked unit ID)will appear solid below the CRW name. The VU Meter responds to the received audio on the selected channel (talkgroup). This test will demonstrate that: (I)call activity is properly displayed on the Elite console, and (2)the VU Meter responds to the received audio on the selected channel or talkgroup. Test Step 1: Initiate an inbound transmission from a radio on a channel (talkgroup) which is deselected at all operator positions. Step 2: Verify that the word "Call" (or the alias/trunked unit ID) flashes on the associated resource, at all operator positions, during the incoming call (because the resource is not selected anywhere). Step 3: Select the resource of Step 2, at operator position OP 1. Verify that the word "Call"(or the alias/trunked unit ID) on the associated resource is on steadily at all other operator positions during the incoming call. Step 4: Verify that the word "Call" (or the alias/trunked unit ID) on the associated resource flashes during the incoming call, only at the operator position where the resource is selected (i.e. operator position OP1). Step 5: Verify that the VU Meter responds to the received audio on the selected resource (talkgroup). Notes/Comments OM Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 2 C. 25 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 2 ❖ACCEPTANCE TEST PLAN Select and Unselect Speaker Operation and Volume Controls This test will demonstrate the operation of the Select and Unselect speakers at a console operator position. Received transmissions on selected channels (talkgroups) will be heard in the console Select speaker. Received transmissions on deselected channels (talkgroups)will be heard in the console Unselect speaker.A volume control is located on both the Select and Unselect speakers. In addition, the received audio level for a particular channel(talkgroup) may be adjusted on the associated Channel Resource Window(CRW). Test Step 1: Initiate an inbound transmission from a radio on a deselected channel (talkgroup). Step 2: Verify that the received audio is heard in the Unselect speaker. Step 3: Verify that the volume level can be adjusted using the knob on the Unselect speaker. Step 4: Select the resource for the channel or talkgroup of Step 1. Verify that the received audio is now heard on the Select speaker. Step 5: Verify that the volume level can be adjusted using the knob on the Select speaker. Step 6: Verify that the volume level for the selected resource can also be adjusted by positioning the mouse cursor in the Volume Control line, and pressing the left button to lower the volume, or the right button to raise the volume. Notes/Comments (M)nOroaOs..a Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 2 S• 26 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 2 ❖ACCEPTANCE TEST PLAN Headset Operation This test will demonstrate the operation of the console position headset. When a headset is inserted into the headset jack, the Select speaker is muted, and the microphone and Select speaker audio are transferred to the headset. The Unselect speaker audio will continue to be heard on the Unselect speaker. Test Step 1: Select a channel (talkgroup) and verify that received audio is heard in the Select speaker. Step 2: Depress the General Transmit button on the CIE, and speak into the console mounted microphone. Verify that console audio is heard by the field radio user. Step 3: Plug a headset into the headset jack at the operator position. Verify that selected receive audio is now heard in the headset, while the Select speaker is muted. Verify that Unselect audio will continue to be heard out of the Unselect speaker. Step 4: Depress the General Transmit button on the CIE, and speak into the headset microphone. Verify that console audio is heard by the field radio user. Step 5: Remove the headset from the jack. Verify that select audio is restored in the Select speaker. Notes/Comments OMOTOOOLA Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 2 ) 27 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 2 ❖ACCEPTANCE TEST PLAN Instant Transmit Operation This test will demonstrate the use of the instant transmit function. The instant transmit feature allows the console operator to transmit on a given channel(talkgroup), without having to select the channel(talkgroup)first. This is a convenient way to send a transmission without deselecting the operator's primary channel. Test Step 1: Position the mouse cursor over a deselected Resource. Step 2: Depress and hold the Instant Transmit button in the Resource. Verify that the Resource indicates a transmit condition. Step 3: Turn on a radio with the selected talkgroup. Verify that all other console operator positions show a busy indication on the corresponding Resource. Notes/Comments &sorosroua Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 2 ❖ 28 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 2 ❖ACCEPTANCE TEST PLAN Busy Indication When a console operator generates a PTT, all other operator positions will show a "Busy"indication on the associated talkgroup(channel) control window. This test will demonstrate the proper display of channel or talkgroup busy status at all other console operator positions, when one position is transmitting. Test Step 1: Open the same Resource at several operator positions. Step 2: Transmit on that Resource from any one of the operator positions. Step 3: Verify that all other operator positions indicate the channel is in use (busy indication). Step 4: Remove the transmit condition at the operator position of Step 2. Verify that the busy indication goes off at all other operator positions. Notes/Comments ()MOTOROLA Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 2 ❖ 29 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 2 ❖ACCEPTANCE TEST PLAN Supervisor Position Control The supervisor operator position is provided with immediate access to a channel or talkgroup, regardless of any other console activity. The supervisor uses the instant transmit feature to override a dispatcher transmission on any channel or talkgroup. This test will demonstrate the priority access feature of the supervisor console position. Test Step 1: Initiate a console transmission from a non-supervisor operator position, on any channel or talkgroup (selected or deselected), and hold this channel in the transmit mode. Step 2: Verify that a transmit indication is on at the non-supervisor position, and a busy indication is on at the supervisor position(on the CRW corresponding to the busy channel). Step 3: At the supervisor position, depress the Instant Transmit button (on the mouse) for the CRW in use,while the busy condition is displayed. Step 4: Verify that the busy indication goes off at the supervisor position, and is now on at the non-supervisor position. Step 5: Verify that the transmit indication is on at the supervisor position, and is off at the non-supervisor position. Step 6: Verify that the transmission from the non-supervisor position is interrupted, and the console transmission is now originating from the supervisor position. Notes/Comments @MOTOROLA Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 2 ❖ 30 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 2 ❖ACCEPTANCE TEST PLAN Talkgroup Call Operation This test will demonstrate talkgroup call processing and system access for a console operator position. Test Step 1: Initiate a talkgroup call from a console operator position, by first "selecting" the talkgroup Resource, and then depressing the General Transmit button on the CIE, or the footswitch. Step 2: Verify that only the radios in the talkgroup are able to monitor and respond to the call. Step 3: Verify talkgroup calls from the console operator positions, for other talkgroups available at the console operator positions. Step 4: Disable or busy all system voice channels except for one. Step 5: Press and hold the PTT button of a radio unit from talkgroup A, to capture the remaining voice channel. Step 6: From any console operator position, transmit on the CRW for talkgroup B. Verify that the console operator position receives a busy indication from the trunking system. Step 7: Release the PTT button of the talkgroup A radio. Step 8: Verify that the console operator position receives a"call back". Notes/Comments °MOTOROLA Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 2 C• 31 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 2 ❖ACCEPTANCE TEST PLAN PTT-ID and Emergency Status Display The console operator positions will display the alias (or trunked unit ID) of subscriber radios in the talkgroup control window, each time a subscriber unit initiates a PIT. The subscriber radios will be programmed to send their ID on every transmission. The console operator positions will also display Emergency Call IDs and generate audible alerts when a subscriber radio initiates an Emergency Alarm/Call. This test will demonstrate the display, queuing and processing of PTT unit IDs and Emergency Call IDs at the Elite console position. Test Step 1: Select talkgroup A on two subscriber radios. Depress the PTT button on radio 1. Step 2: Verify that the unit alias (or trunked unit ID) of radio 1, is displayed on the Elite console for the talkgroup of Step 1. Step 3: Depress the PTT button on radio 2, during the channel hang-time. Verify that the unit alias (or trunked unit ID) of radio 2, is also displayed in the Resource for the selected talkgroup on the Elite console. Step 4: Observe that the PTT-IDs are displayed for both message-trunked arid transmission-trunked talkgroups. Step 5: Initiate a Trunked Emergency from a portable or mobile radio. When the Trunked Emergency is received at the console, the Emergency Alarm tone will sound and the talkgroup border will flash red. The trunked ID of the unit that initiated the Emergency will appear in the Call Status line. Step 6: Open the Emergency window. The Emergency window will have four icons displayed. The selections in the Emergency Window are: ACKNOWLEDGE will turn off the Emergency Alarm at ALL OPERATOR POSITIONS. SETUP initiates an Emergency call on the selected talkgroup. KNOCKDOWN ends the audible Emergency alarm on the chosen talkgroup at ALL OPERATOR POSITIONS. CLOSE removes this window without affecting the status of the Emergency Alarm. Step 7: Acknowledge the alarm by selecting the ACKNOWLEDGE icon in the emergency window. (M)MoroRouA Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 2 ❖ 32 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 2 ❖ACCEPTANCE TEST PLAN Step 8: Select the Resource Window with the mouse/trackball Choose button. Audio from the emergency unit will be heard through the Select speaker. Step 9: At the end of call activity, a trunking system time out begins. The emergency call remains in the trunking system until the emergency time out ends. Use ZoneWatch Grid Screen to confirm the hang time duration. Step 10: If the time out in the system expires but the subscriber has not cleared the emergency condition from the mobile/portable unit, the emergency call gets established again on a subscriber PTT. Step 11: To end the call, select the KNOCKDOWN icon. Notes/Comments ®MOTOROLA Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 2 :• 33 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 2 ❖ACCEPTANCE TEST PLAN Console Priority The console operator is provided with priority access on any channel or talkgroup which can be monitored at the console operator position. Through console priority, a dispatcher can override any field radio unit transmissions. While the dispatcher is transmitting, it is still possible for afield unit to access the system, as the dispatcher will be able to hear anyone calling in. This test will demonstrate the console priority capability of the system. Test Step 1: Initiate a talkgroup call with a radio in talkgroup A. Step 2: Observe that the receive audio can be heard on any other radios which have talkgroup A selected, and on the console operator positions. Step 3: While a field radio unit is keyed and making a voice call, transmit from a console operator position on the CRW for talkgroup A. Step 4: Observe that console audio is now being transmitted over the assigned voice channel, in place of the field radio audio. Notes/Comments ()MoronOLa Attachment B--3/1312000 Section 2 :• 34 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 2 ❖ACCEPTANCE TEST PLAN Multi-Select Operation The Multi-Select function allows the console operator to group a number of talkgroups (or channels)together, such that when the General Transmit button on the mouse or footswitch is depressed, all of the Multi-Selected talkgroups(or channels) will transmit at the same time with the same console transmit audio. Talkgroups included in a Multi-Select grouping are normally merged onto a single voice channel during the console transmission. Note:Multi-Select merge can be enabled/disabled at each console operator position. This test will demonstrate the procedure for setting up multi-group calls from a console operator position. Test Step 1: Use Radios 1, 2, 3, and 4. Select the Multi-Sel folder at the upper right of the Elite screen using the trackball or mouse cursor. The border of the MSEL folder will turn green. Step 2: Add channels/talkgroups to the open multi-select by moving the cursor to a Resource Window and hitting the Choose button (left button) on the trackball/mouse. Step 3: Depress the Transmit button or the footswitch to transmit over the open multi-select group. Note that the transmit indicators appear in each of the Resource Windows included in the Multi-Select. Step 4: Select two subscriber radios using different talkgroups and ensure that they are affiliated at the same site. initiate a Multi-Select call from the console and verify that only one channel is assigned for the call. Step 5: Close the multi-select group by either choosing another multi-select group, or by removing all members from the MSEL folder. Notes/Comments ®noronoss Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 2 •:• 35 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 2 ❖ACCEPTANCE TEST PLAN Patch Operation The Patch function allows the console operator to group(Patch) two or more talkgroups (or channels) together, thereby enabling voice communications between the patched talkgroups and the dispatcher. Talkgroups included in a Patch set-up are merged onto a single voice channel for the duration of the Patch operation. This test will demonstrate the procedure for patching talkgroups together at a console operator position. Test Step 1: Select a patch folder in the upper right corner of the Elite screen. Select the channels/talkgroups to be included in the patch by"Choosing"them. Note that all members added to the patch will display the patch icon with the appropriate patch number. Step 2: Choose the Patch Xmit button on the Elite console to transmit to all chosen resources. Step 3: Verify that all chosen channels/talkgroups receive the console audio and that all patched groups can communicate with each other. Step 4: Select two subscriber radios using different talkgroups and ensure that they are affiliated at the same site. Initiate a Patch Transmit from the console and verify that only one channel is assigned for the call. Step 5: Dissolve the patch by selecting the patch folder and deselecting the Resource Window. Notes/Comments CM)MOTosnOLA Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 2 ❖ 36 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 2 d•ACCEPTANCE TEST PLAN Conventional Station Interface The system will have various conventional stations interfaced to it. This test will demonstrate the ability of the appropriate Elite console to monitor activity on a conventional channel interfaced to its Central Electronics Bank(CEB). Test Step 1: Verify that the required conventional channels are configured on the appropriate ELITE operator positions. Step 2: Verify that the conventional channel Resource can be selected. Step 3: Transmit on a conventional Resource. Verify that field radio users can hear the console transmission. Step 4:Transmit with one of the user radios on the conventional channel. Verify that the call is heard on the select speaker(or headset) at the console operator position. Notes/Comments M°MOTOROLA Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 2 •) 37 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 2 ❖ACCEPTANCE TEST PLAN Call Alert Operation The Call Alert feature allows the console operator to selectively alert an individual radio unit. The signaling is done over the control channel, and produces an audible and visual alert on the target radio. The console operator is provided with an acknowledgment if the target radio unit is turned on and in range. This test will demonstrate the operation of the Call Alert function from a console operator position. Test Step 1: Choose a radio and note the ID number. Step 2: Click on the Private Call resource window on a dispatch console and open the drop down dialog box. Click on the Call Alert icon (a portable with musical notes)to activate the Call Alert dialog box. Step 3: Select or type in the ID of the subscriber unit to be alerted and click on the Send button. Confirm that the receiving radio emits the 4 rapid chirps that signify a Call Alert. Step 4: Confirm that the receiving radio displays "Page Received" or the equivalent. Notes/Comments ®MOTOROLA Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 2 + 38 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 2 ❖ACCEPTANCE TEST PLAN Private Conversation Call The Private Conversation feature allows the console operator to selectively call an individual radio unit and conduct a conversation, which other radios in the talkgroup cannot hear. This test will demonstrate the operation of the Private Conversation function from a console operator position. Test Initiating a Private Call Step 1: Choose a Private Call Resource Window on a console. Open the drop down dialog box. Click on the Private Call icon to bring up the Private Call window. Step 2: Either select the subscriber unit ID from the preprogrammed list, or type in the unit's ID or alias. Step 3: Press the "Send"button in the Private Call dialog box. Confirm that a green balloon appears above the Private Call icon to indicate the Call has been set up. Step 4: Press the Instant Transmit button in the Private Call resource window and confirm that the subscriber unit receives two alert beeps and audio from the dispatch console. Step 5: Respond to the Private Call by pressing the subscriber unit PTT and speaking. The radio audio should appear at the dispatch console. Step 6: Discontinue the Private Call by clicking on the Private Call icon. Confirm that the subscriber radio no longer receives private call audio. Clear the Private Call condition in the subscriber unit as well. Receiving a Private Call Step 1: Initiate a Private Call from one of the subscriber units (if necessary refer to the Trunked Features section). Step 2: Verify that the Console beeps, notifying the Dispatcher about the incoming call . Notes/Comments OM0T0R0LA Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 2 :• 39 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 2 ❖ACCEPTANCE TEST PLAN Console Database Manager (CDM)/Alias Database Manager (ADM) Server This test will demonstrate the operation of the CDM/ADM server as it pertains to programming the layout of the Elite consoles associated with it as well as the programming of Radio User Aliases for the Zone Test Step 1: Launch the CDM application in Zone 2 and observe that all of the Zone 2 console hardware is configured here. Step 2: Observe that the CDM assigns which operator positions in the Zone will have access to which talkgroups. Step 3: Exit the CDM application. Step 4: Launch the Elite Admin application. Step 5: Create a new configuration file and add talkgroups to various folders within the file. Step 6: Launch a Zone 2 Elite Dispatch application and load the configuration file created in Step 5. Step 7: Verify the screen layout is as designed in Elite Admin. Step 8: Launch the ADM application. Step 9: Under the"Alias"pull-down menu, select "Synchronize". Step 10: Select the Aliases to be downloaded by selecting the appropriate security partition. Step 11: Once the synchronization is complete, observe that the Unit Aliases will be displayed on the Elite Operator positions within that Zone after a few minutes. Notes/Comments ()MOTOROLA Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 2 :• 40 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 2 ❖ACCEPTANCE TEST PLAN Network Management System User Configuration Subsystem The User Configuration Subsystem provides the capability to define the system infrastructure configuration, and the subscriber database. This test will demonstrate the capability and functions of the User Configuration Subsystem tool as it pertains to configuring radio users and talkgroups. Test Step 1: Using any ZM user terminal, access the UCS to configure both subscribers and talkgroups: • Radio User and Talkgroup Configuration ❖ Home Zone Assignments Notes/Comments @MOTOROLA Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 2 •> 41 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 2 ❖ACCEPTANCE TEST PLAN Alarm/Fault Reporting and Diagnostics The Network Management(NM)system provides the capability to monitor the health and status of the system in real time via the Integrated Network Manager(INM). It also provides diagnostic functions which can be used to diagnose system faults. This test will demonstrate the trunking system alarm reporting and diagnostics capability of the NM system. Test Step 1: Maneuver through the Integrated Network Manager and observe how all pieces of the system are displayed and how faults are reported. Step 2: From the main Zone manager screen (System Objects window), select the IntelliRepeater object from the radio system infrastructure window. Step 3: Select current status from the Fault Management menu. Verify that the system's operating status is displayed in the current status screen. Step 4: Select a system component from the System Objects window and open the current status window. From the Fault Management menu, select "diagnostics". Perform a diagnostic test on the selected object, and observe that the diagnostic test is completed. Step 5: Access the current alarms screens. Observe that any unacknowledged alerts and alarms are displayed. Delete some current alerts and alarms. Step 6: Verify that the deleted alerts and alarms are displayed in the alert and/or alarm history screens. Step 7: Disable a channel. Verify that the fault is displayed on the current alerts and/or alarms screens. Notes/Comments OMOronoLA Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 2 + 42 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 2 +ACCEPTANCE TEST PLAN NM Statistical Reports and Performance Monitoring The NM provides the capability to generate various types of statistical reports, and monitors the overall performance of the system. This test will demonstrate the statistical reporting and performance monitoring capability of the NM system. Test Step 1: The summary reports will be generated for the selected time period. Verify the procedure to set the report time intervals. Step 2: Observe that the Zone Summary report includes a general summary of the traffic information on the entire system. Step 3: Observe that the Group Summary report provides call information (number, duration, busies) sorted by talkgroup. Step 4: Observe that the Individual Summary report provides call information (number, duration busies) sorted by individual radio user. Step 5: Observe that the Channel Summary report provides call information (number, duration, busies) sorted by channel. Notes/Comments °MOTOROLA Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 2 1. 43 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 2 ❖ACCEPTANCE TEST PLAN Radio Control Manager The Radio Control Manager provides the capability to assign access to, and execute various dispatch type commands, such as "Call Alert", "Selective Radio Inhibit"and "Dynamic Regrouping." Test Call Alert Step 1: Send a Call Alert to a subscriber radio from the Zone dispatcher terminal. Observe that the target radio receives the Call Alert. Step 2: Turn off the radio and repeat Step 6. Verify that the Zone dispatcher terminal provides an indication that the Call Alert was not successful (i.e., verify via the "task"command that the operation was not successful). Radio Inhibit Step 1: Send a Radio Inhibit command to a subscriber radio from the Zone dispatcher terminal. Observe that the target radio appears dead and is not able to transmit or receive. Step 2: Acknowledge, via the "task" command, that the radio is inhibited. Step 3: Send an X-inhibit command to the radio. Observe that the target radio is once again operational. Step 4: Verify that a Radio Inhibit command will not be successful if the target unit is turned off. Observe that an indication is provided on the Zone manager terminal. Notes/Comments °MOTOROLA Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 2 :• 44 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 2 ❖ACCEPTANCE TEST PLAN Security Management Security Management provides the capability to limit access to the information contained in the NM system databases via multiple password levels. This test will demonstrate the procedure which is used to assign passwords and limit access to the NM system databases and functions. Test Step 1: Start up the Zone manager terminal. Enter a valid login ID and press enter. Step 2: Enter the correct password and press enter. Verify successful logon. Step 3: Repeat with an incorrect password. Verify that the terminal rejects the logon request. Step 4: Logon to the Zone manager as "supermgr"(password= secure). Once the Zone window appears, select "UCS"to start the UCS application. Step 5: Set up a new security group (agency), by selecting the security group object and entering the name of the new security group. Step 6: Assign an existing talkgroup to this new security group (this is done by changing the security group name in the talkgroup's record). Step 7: Set up a new user with the new security group (select user object in the Zone system objects window and define new user). Step 8: Select the user password object and assign a password to the new user's alias. Exit the password configuration screen. Step 9: Logout of the Zone manager program. Step 10: Login as the new user and access the talkgroup records. Step 11: Verify that the only talkgroup record which appears is the record that was set up with the new security group. Notes/Comments OMoronoLA Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 2 C. 45 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 2 •O ACCEPTANCE TEST PLAN Failure Scenarios Voice Channel Repeater Failure When a voice channel repeater fails at a remote site, the affected channel is automatically removed from service at all sites where it exists. This test will demonstrate the system's reaction to a single voice channel failure and the fault reporting provided. Test Step 1: Power down a repeater for one channel at any remote site. Step 2: Verify that an alarm message is provided on the Zone Manager sessions as well as on the INM. Step 3: Press PTT on a portable radio several times to utilize all available voice channels. Step 4: Verify that the failed voice channel is not assigned. Step 5: Power up the repeater station. Observe that the channel is restored to operational status. Notes/Comments M°MOTOROLA Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 2 •: 46 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 2 ❖ACCEPTANCE TEST PLAN Control Channel Repeater Failure This test will demonstrate how the system recovers from control channel failures. The following failure scenarios will be verified: 1. If the assigned control channel fails at a remote site, the channel is removed from service, and another channel is assigned for control channel duty. 2. If there are no control channel repeaters available at a site, the site will revert to a conventional fall-back mode of operation. Note: the rest of the system will continue full mode trunked operation at the remaining sites. Test Step 1: Initially channel 1 will be the active control channel. In a Zone system. channel 1 must be marked as the "preferred control channel". Step 2: Disable channel 1 at a remote site. Verify that an appropriate alarm message is displayed on the Zone Manager Session and INM. Step 3: Verify that channel 2 is now the active control channel. Step 4: Disable all control channels at the same remote site. Verify that the system will remove the affected site from service, and continues to operate in wide area franking. Step 5: Re-enable all control channels. Verify that channel 1 remains the active control channel. Notes/Comments OMOTOROLA Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 2 + 47 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 2 ❖ACCEPTANCE TEST PLAN Zone Controller Failure If a Zone Controller fails, the remote sites associated with that zone will continue to operate in "site"trunking mode with no Zone connection. In this mode, each site in the failed zone operates independently. Subscriber database control will be transferred to the individual sites. The loss of a Zone Controller will disable the associated Audio Switch and Management Network portions of that zone, however the remaining zone will continue to operate in wide area mode. This test will demonstrate the system's reaction to and recovery from a failure to a Zone Controller. Test Step 1: Disable Zone Controller 2, simulating a failure. Step 2: Observe that the all of the Zone 2 sites are now operating in "Site Trunking" mode. Step 3: Using 4 subscriber radios, affiliate radios 1 and 2 at Site #1 in Zone 2 and radios 3 and 4 at Site#2 in Zone 2. Step 4: Ensure all radios are set to talkgroup A. Step 5: Keyup radio I and observe that the audio is heard only in radio 2. Step 6: Keyup radio 3 and observe that the audio is heard only in radio 4. Step 7: Observe that the Zone 2 Elite consoles are inoperative. Step 8: Observe the failure indications on the INM. Step 9: Re-enable the Zone Controller 2. Step 10: Observe that the Zone 2 sites return to Wide Area Trunking. Step 11: Observe that the Zone 2 Elite consoles are operative. Step 12: Observe that Interzone calls are available. Step 13: Observe the re-enabling in the INM. Notes/Comments OM Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 2 48 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 2 ❖ACCEPTANCE TEST PLAN T1 Network Link to Single Remote Site Failure If a link to a remote site fails, the system will continue to operate in wide area trunking mode without the failed remote site. The disconnected site will continue to trunk independently. This test will demonstrate the system's reaction to a remote site T1 link failure. Test Step 1: Disable (disconnect)the site link to a particular site. Step 2: Observe that the system continues to operate in full wide area trunking mode without the affected remote site. Setup a talkgroup call and verify that system operation is not affected. Step 3: Restore the site link of Step 1. Verify that the remote site is returned to normal operation. Notes/Comments °MOTOROLA Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 2 49 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 2 ❖ACCEPTANCE TEST PLAN Attatchment "B" System Component Check List ./ Indicates test was performed successfully. Actual readings will be recorded as obtained. QUANTAR IntelliRepeater# 1 Model # Serial # ❑ TX Frequency MHZ (circle one) +/- Khz O RX Frequency MHZ O Power Out Watts ❑ Maximum deviation Khz ❑ Receive Sensitivity 20 dbq ❑ or Receive Sensitivity 12 dB sinad ❑ Squelch Level microvolts ❑ Line Level In at 2/3 system deviation DBM ❑ Line Level Out at 2/3 system deviation DBM Transmitter Combiner Model # Serial # _ Combiner Port# ❑ Power IN ❑ Power Out ❑ Loss in DB M°MoroROLA Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 2 •: 50 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 2 ❖ACCEPTANCE TEST PLAN The following need only to be tested once per site Receiver Multi-coupler Model # Serial # ❑ Measured Noise Floor with no Padding__ Microvolts ❑ Antenna Port 12 dB Sensivity w/o pads Microvolts O Test Port 12 dB Sensivity w/o pads Microvolts El Test Port 12 dB Sensivity with dB pad Microvolts ❑ RX Test Frequency MHZ Line Loss in dB or BER El End to End circuit loss ❑ Bit Error Rate Omorone LA Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 2 •• 51 Confidential and Proprietary Section 3 Statement of Work Weld County SmartZone System TABLE OF CONTENTS 3. STATEMENT OF WORK 1 3.1 PURPOSE OF STATEMENT OF WORK 1 3.2 MOTOROLA SYSTEM RESPONSIBILITIES(GENERAL) 1 3.3 WELD COUNTY SYSTEM RESPONSIBILITIES(GENERAL) 2 3.4 SITE PREPARATION 2 3.4.1 Grounding and Surge Suppression 3 3.4.2 Electrical 3 3.4.3 Equipment Space 3 3.4.4 Environmental Conditions 3 3.4.5 Earthquake Bracing 4 3.4.6 Site Access 4 3.4.7 Towers 4 3.5 SYSTEM IMPLEMENTATION 4 3.5.1 Factory Staging 5 3.5.2 Installation and Optimization of Fixed Equipment 5 3.6 ACCEPTANCE TEST PROCEDURES 5 3.7 MOBILES AND PORTABLES 6 3.7.1 Fleetmap and Templates 6 3.8 TRAINING 6 3.9 SYSTEM DOCUMENTATION 6 3.9.1 Design Documentation 6 3.9.2 CCSI Documentation 7 3.9.3 System Manual- "As-Built"Documentation 7 3.10 SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE 8 3.11 PROJECT SCHEDULE 10 3.11.1 Change Order Procedure 10 3.12 WORK BREAKDOWN STRUCTURE 12 0 Moronotn Attachment B--3/13/2000 Table of Contents ❖ I Confidential and Proprietary 3. STATEMENT OF WORK 3.1 PURPOSE OF STATEMENT OF WORK This Statement of Work (SOW) describes the work to be performed for the installation, optimization, and testing of an IR site add-on to the Douglas County SmartZone for Weld County. It delineates responsibilities between Motorola and Weld County as agreed to by contract. The Motorola Systems Integration team will be led by a Project Manager whose primary function is to successfully implement the project, within the allotted timeframe Changes to this document shall be made through a Change Order as described in section 3.11.1 of this SOW. 3.2 MOTOROLA SYSTEM RESPONSIBILITIES (GENERAL) Motorola will be responsible for the performance of all equipment as provided under this contract. Weld County will assume responsibility for the performance of all other equipment necessary for completion of this project not provided by Motorola. Motorola's responsibilities on this communications project are further defined in the Project Schedule and in the Work Breakdown Structure (WBS) which is part of this SOW. Motorola's general responsibilities include the following: • Provide a Project Manager as a primary point of contact ❖ Provide a project implementation team to implement Weld County's system as defined in this SOW and the System Description ❖ Record minutes of all project meetings d• Schedule the system upgrades and cutover in agreement with Weld County so as to minimize the downtime of the system and the impact to Weld County + Coordinate the activities of all Motorola subcontractors under this contract. ❖ Administer safety work procedures for construction and installation. OMOTOROLA Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 3 :• 1 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 3 ❖ STATEMENT OF WORK 3.3 WELD COUNTY SYSTEM RESPONSIBILITIES (GENERAL) Weld County responsibilities include: ❖ Provide a designated project manager for system implementation. • Host all project meetings ❖ Supply primary commercial power, wiring, and cable terminations. • Supply all FCC, FAA, zoning, site access, and other permits (including but not limited to easements, impact studies, planning commission approval, variances) or any other agreements required to gain use of sites d• Posting the RF license for radio sites prior to testing ❖ Supply the site links (i.e. telephone circuits, microwave, leased T1, etc) as required to accommodate the audio and data signals required for the Motorola system. Motorola will provide the appropraite link specification to Weld County. ❖ Secure the right to use new site locations. 3.4 SITE PREPARATION Motorola will begin work at a site only after mutual agreement by Weld County and Motorola, that the site is deemed ready. At a minimum, Site Ready requires a site to have adequate room in an existing building or shelter to accommodate the equipment to be installed, and electrical service and internal distribution in place. In addition, network testing must have been satisfactorily completed. Sites are required to meet or exceed the requirements as defined in the Motorola document "Fixed Network Equipment Installations". Motorola part number 68- 81089E50-0 (R56 Standard). Detailed Site Ready audits will be performed by Motorola after contract execution. Motorola will provide a detailed site report identifying any site deficiencies. All site upgrades not identified in this document specifically as a Motorola deliverable are the responsibility of Weld County. Weld County may elect to contract Motorola to perform necessary site upgrades, perform the upgrades itself, or utilize the services of a third party subcontractor. Site requirements must be met for Motorola to begin installation of system equipment. Weld County will be responsible for any project delay costs if sites do not meet the site ready condition as defined in the project schedule. Motorola will coordinate site access on a mutually approved schedule with Weld County. °MOTOROLA Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 3 ❖ 2 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 3 ❖ STATEMENT OF WORK 3.4.1 Grounding and Surge Suppression Requirement- A single point system ground of(5) ohms or less, to be used on all fixed equipment supplied under the Contract is required. The ground system must include an internal site tie point within (3) feet of the Motorola supplied equipment. System transient suppression for the telephone circuits, the AC power, radio frequency(RF) cabling and grounding protection is also required to meet or exceed the R56 requirements. System Impact-Equipment installed at a site that does not meet the (5) ohms or less grounding point or site transient suppression will be considered as NOT in "normal use" for warranty purposes. Also, equipment at the site that is not part of this project, which has been installed with installation deficiencies that may adversely impact the integrity of the Motorola supplied equipment, may also cause the equipment installed in this project to be considered NOT in "normal use" for warranty purposes if not rectified within 10 working days. 3.4.2 Electrical Requirement- An electrical service and electrical wiring that meets all applicable city, county, state, and National Electrical Codes (NEC) requirements is required. System Impact-Weld County will be financially responsible for any project delay cost caused by its failure to provide site power requirements within the time required by the project schedule. 3.4.3 Equipment Space Requirement- Site floor and desk space for the Motorola supplied equipment as identified in the approved equipment installation location document. System Impact- Weld County will be financially responsible for any project delay cost if the space requirements are not available according to the project timeline. 3.4.4 Environmental Conditions Requirement- Adequate environmental control for all dispatch operator console equipment. This includes heating, ventilation, cooling, and humidity requirements. The site will be free of hazardous materials such as fuels, asbestos, etc. Contact Motorola to obtain specific equipment specifications required for building environmental control sizing and design. °MOTOROLA Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 3 C. 3 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 3 ❖STATEMENT OF WORK System Impact-Equipment installed at a site that does not meet the environmental control requirements will be considered as NOT in "normal use" for warranty purposes. 3.4.5 Earthquake Bracing Requirement- Weld County will supply as required, building modifications to accommodate earthquake bracing to meet all applicable city, county, state or national requirements. If Weld County elects to perform some or all of the physical installation of the fixed equipment (as defined in the contract), earthquake bracing must be installed before Motorola resources can optimize the equipment. System Impact-Weld County will be financially responsible for any project delay cost if the earthquake bracing is not complete according to the project timeline. 3.4.6 Site Access Requirement- Weld County to provide site access for scheduled site walks, installation, optimization, system troubleshooting and completion of ATP. Weld County shall use its best efforts to provide site access including transportation to sites that are not accessible by regular four-wheel drive vehicles in all but the most extreme weather conditions. Weld County will be the responsible to coordinate and schedule with the Motorola Project Manager access to sites not directly controlled by Weld County. 3.4.7 Towers Requirement-If an existing tower or structure is utilized at any site, a structural engineering and grounding analysis report must be generated before the proposed antenna network is installed. Existing or original tower/site specifications or reports with current loading and grounding detail are required 3.5 SYSTEM IMPLEMENTATION Implementation of the project will proceed according to the mutually agreed Project Schedule and WBS. The WBS and schedule define project the inter-dependencies of the WBS and schedule tasks. As well as reflecting who is the responsible party for each task. A detailed WBS is part of this SOW. Motorola's phased approach to implementation includes factory staging, site development, infrastructure and subscriber unit installation, optimization and programming, and testing of the communications network. ( Mororaoua Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 3 :• 4 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 3 •O STATEMENT OF WORK 3.5.1 Factory Staging Specialized technical teams work with factory and field project managers, project engineers, and product group personnel to set up the system at CCSI. All connectorization and cabling will be performed between the various system components to provide an operational system within the staging facility. CCSI staff builds the system from approved drawings, configuring equipment as it will be at its final destination. The intent of the staging effort is to verify system functionality and expedite the installation effort at the various final installation locations. During system staging, the factory Acceptance Test Procedures (ATP) will be performed. Additional field A I'Ps will be performed after final installation and system optimization in the field. 3.5.2 Installation and Optimization of Fixed Equipment Perform Installation of Motorola Supplied Equipment Motorola will install the equipment as defined by the Equipment List and WBS. Perform On-Site Optimization and Test of Motorola Supplied Equipment Motorola will verify correct operation of all Motorola supplied equipment as the equipment is installed. Once the equipment has been verified that it is correctly installed, Motorola's System Technologist will optimize the entire system. Further, Motorola will verify and reset as necessary, all audio and data levels between Motorola supplied equipment and the inter-site transmission network demarcation points. 3.6 ACCEPTANCE TEST PROCEDURES Any system testing that Weld County wants performed that is not specified in the ATP section of this proposal must be reviewed by Motorola for feasibility and acceptability. Any additional tests also represent a change in the project's scope. The Acceptance Test Procedures section of this proposal details the procedures to confirm that the system provided by Motorola is complete and meets the acceptance test criteria. Each segment will be tested independently using detailed check sheets to be provided by Motorola, as appropriate, and approved by Weld County prior to commencement of acceptance testing. If deficiencies are found during the testing, both the deficiencies and resolutions to the deficiencies shall be agreed upon and documented. Where the defined deficiencies do not prevent productive operational use of the system, the test (D MOTOROLA Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 3 ❖ 5 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 3 ❖STATEMENT OF WORK will be deemed to have been completed. Motorola will, however, remain responsible for the resolution of the remaining deficiencies as agreed to. 3.7 MOBILES AND PORTABLES 3.7.1 Fleetmap and Templates Motorola will develop the system Fleetmap and programming Templates for Weld County. Weld County must approve the programming templates. A maximum of TEN radio templates will be created. Modifications required to the templates by Weld County after the initial templates have been developed will be performed at an additional cost under a change order. This agreement does not include the actual programming or installation of the subscriber units. 3.8 TRAINING A detailed training plan is included in this proposal. 3.9 SYSTEM DOCUMENTATION Motorola provides documentation of the system configurations, physical installation, and system testing. Documentation is created and updated three times during a project. 3.9.1 Design Documentation Motorola will create or update the following documents during the design phase: • Equipment List S• System Description ❖ Block and level diagrams for system and sites ❖ Coverage Maps ❖ Acceptance Test Procedures ❖ Programming parameters ❖ Drawings lmoroROLA Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 3 C. 6 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 3 ❖STATEMENT OF WORK 3.9.2 CCSI Documentation Motorola will create or update the following documents of system staging at CCSI: d• Programming Templates d• Interconnection drawings ❖ Interconnection charts ❖ Manufacturer's standard operator manuals ❖ Re-assembly instructions d• Interconnection cable description and inventory ❖ Printout of equipment parameters ❖ Inventory with serial numbers and installation reference ❖ Software/firmware version number d• Manufacturer's standard technical manuals 3.9.3 System Manual - "As-Built" Documentation Motorola will supply "as-built" documentation for the system. The documentation will consist of: ❖ System Drawings: • Plan and elevation views of the equipment installation at the radio site • Equipment inter-cabling diagrams for each site ❖ Demarcation wiring lists ❖ Programming and level setting data sheets ❖ Equipment by Site • Key access procedures • Site inventory lists • Remote sign-on procedures and passwords • Software versions and equipment wiring by equipment site ❖ Radio Licenses ❖ Field Acceptance Test Plan test sheets and results °MOTOROLA Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 3 :• 7 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 3 ❖STATEMENT OF WORK • Coverage maps and Coverage Acceptance Test Plan results •S R56 site audit ❖ Warranty information, Service Provider 3.10 SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE System Acceptance shall be controlled by section 8 of the CSA. A certificate of System Acceptance follows. OMOTOROLA Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 3 :• 8 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 3 ❖STATEMENT OF WORK CERTIFICATE OF SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE Customer Name: Project Name: Customer Name-agrees that all major provisions of the project provided by Motorola are complete and ready for the use intended,except for any minor defects and/or punchlist items noted below: The items listed below will be corrected by Motorola: Item Description Complete Date 1.) 2.) 3.) No defects or punchlist is applicable. This agreement documents to the start of warranty on ,and authorizes Motorola to bill for the remaining value of the contract,and it indicates Customer's Name agreement to make the final payment. Customer Representative: Motorola Representative: Print Full Name: Print Full Name: Title: Title: Signature: Signature: Date: Date: _ 1 _J Customer Representative: Motorola Representative: Print Full Name: Print Full Name: _ Title: Title: _ Signature: Signature: Date: Date:_ OMOTOROLA Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 3 ❖ 9 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 3 ❖STATEMENT OF WORK 3.11 PROJECT SCHEDULE Please find attached to this document, the Project Schedule as proposed by Motorola. Implementation of the two-way radio system will proceed in accordance with a project schedule that is jointly approved by the Motorola project team and Weld County project team. The project schedule will be updated periodically to ensure all parties are apprised of the latest project status. The overall schedule will depend on the Contract Award date. 3.11.1 Change Order Procedure Changes to the contract will be controlled by section 3B of the CSA. The following Change Order Request form must be used for all change order requests. OMOTOROLA Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 3 :• 10 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 3 ❖STATEMENT OF WORK 3.11.1.1 Change Order Request Form Change Order Request No. Requester: Title Phone No. Department _ Description of Request: Equipment Required: SOW Modification Time Line Modification: Additional Services Required: Justification: Budgetary Dollar Value: Equipment: Services: Total: _ Payment Terms: Other Terms: OM wtroroaos—n Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 3 C• 11 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 3 ❖STATEMENT OF WORK Unless amended above, all other terms and conditions of the Agreement shall remain in full force and effect. Approved: Weld County Project Manager Date Motorola Project Manager Date Motorola Engineer Date Motorola Account Manager Date 3.12 WORK BREAKDOWN STRUCTURE The following WBS summarizes the project activities by phase. Each WBS task contains the following information: ❖ WBS number ❖ Action Item to be performed ❖ Deliverable ❖ Who is Accountable for the Action Item ❖ Who has Approval authority over that Action Item Each task requiring Acceptance Test procedures to be executed requires both Weld County and Motorola representatives to witness and approve the test. °MOTOROLA Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 3 •:• 12 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 3 ❖ STATEMENT OF WORK 3.12.1.1 Work Breakdown Structure Matrix WBS # WBS Title Action Deliverable Accountable Approval Contract Award The project schedule starts at Start of Project Contract Award. 1 Design Review Tasks associated with planning the Design review of the Weld County& As defined detailed project execution take place SmartZone design and system Motorola below during this phase of the project. interface design. The Weld County and Motorola will review the SmartZone design through analysis of the system functionality together with the interface requirements as they relate to other SmartZones, as well as end user requirements, as mutually agreed between Motorola and the Weld County. 1.1 Kick Off Meeting A project kickoff meeting will be held Meeting with Weld County Weld County& N/A to formally begin the implementation Motorola of the project, introduce project teams, and review the project. 1.2 Cutover Plan The SmartZone cutover plan will be Cutover Plan Weld County& As defined defined as described below. Motorola below 1.2.1 SmartZone Cutover Motorola will provide technical SmartZone Cutover Plan Motorola Weld County Plan Requirement Input information to the Weld County to Requirement Input determine the SmartZone Cutover requirements 1.2.2 SmartZone Cutover The Weld County will provide SmartZone Cutover Plan Weld County N/A Plan Requirements existing system, new SmartZone, Requirements and user information which must be taken in to account to develop a detailed Cutover plan (WMOTOROLA Attachment B 3/13/2000 Section 3 C. 13 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 3 ❖ STATEMENT OF WORK WBS # WBS Title Action Deliverable Accountable Approval 1.2.3 SmartZone Cutover Motorola and Weld County will SmartZone Cutover Plan Motorola and Motorola Plan create a Cutover Plan. Weld County 1.3 Updated SOW Motorola will update the SOW to Updated SOW Motorola Weld County reflect additional documents created in the Design Review phase, changes in the system implementation schedule, changes in scope, and changes in the system description 1.4 Schedule Planning Motorola and Weld County will Updated SmartZone and Motorola Weld County finalize the SmartZone Project Schedules implementation schedule, adjust the overall project schedule with SmartZone dependencies identified. Motorola and Weld County responsibilities will also be identified. The Weld County's requested acceptance date would be used as a goal when coordinating tasks,which must occur in parallel to meet the Weld County Requested Acceptance Date. 1.5 Design Document Motorola will submit a final Design Design Document Motorola Weld County Document to Weld County. This document will be baseline by the SOW, Project Schedule, and other documentation provided prior to contract approval. 1.6 Staging and Equipment programming and Equipment Configurations and Weld County& As defined Implementation configurations will be determined as Programming Motorola below Preparation: Equipment defined below. Configurations and Programming M)MororaoLn Attachment B--3/1312000 Section 3 + 14 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 3 STATEMENT OF WORK WBS # WBS Title Action Deliverable Accountable Approval 1.7 Equipment Motorola will provide technical Zone Controller Configuration Motorola Weld County Configurations and information to the Weld County to Input Programming aid in determining Zone Controller Templates Input-Zone configurations and programming Controller requirements. 2 Equipment The Weld County will finalize the Zone Controller Configurations Weld County Motorola Configurations and Zone Controller configurations Requirements Programming requirements Templates Requirements—Zone Controller 2.1 Equipment Motorola will provide Zone Controller Zone Controller Configurations Motorola Weld County Configurations and templates and configuration detail as Programming a part of the design document. Templates—Zone Controller 2.1.1 Equipment Motorola will provide technical MOSCAD System Motorola Weld County Configurations and information to the Weld County to Configuration Input Programming aid in determining the MOSCAD Templates Input- System configurations and MOSCAD System [AS programming requirements. REQUIRED] 2.1.2 Equipment The Weld County will finalize the MOSCAD System Weld County Motorola Configurations and MOSCAD System configurations Configurations Requirements Programming requirements Templates Requirements— MOSCAD System 2.1.3 Equipment Motorola will provide MOSCAD MOSCAD System Motorola Weld County Configurations and System templates and configuration Configurations Programming detail as a part of the design Templates—MOSCAD document. System (M&MOTOROLA Attachment B--3113/2000 Section 3 15 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 3 ❖ STATEMENT OF WORK WBS # WBS Title Action Deliverable Accountable Approval 2.1.4 Power Requirements Motorola will provide the power Power requirements defined Motorola Weld County requirements for this SmartZone, including: Total power required for this SmartZone 2.1.5 Site Walks All activities to identify and resolve Site Walks Motorola Weld County site issues will take place during this phase. The following sites will be included in the site walks: [LIST SITES FOR SITE WALKS] 2.1.6 Site Walks—Access The Weld County will assure site Site Access and Information Weld County Motorola and Information access to inspect equipment installation sites,finalize equipment locations and determine if any course of action is necessary to handle installation constraints. 2.1.7 Site Walks and Motorola will participate in the site Site Technical Evaluations Motorola Weld County Inspections—Technical walks and inspections, identifying Evaluation the site requirements for physical space and site upgrades. 2.2 R56 Site Audit Motorola will perform a R56 site R56 Site Audit Motorola N/A audit to verify site readiness. 2.3 Test Data and Audio Motorola will test the Weld County Test Data and Audio Transport Motorola N/A Transport Functionality supplied links Functionality 2.4 Test/verify microwave Test microwave to verify circuit Tested Microwave Circuits Motorola N/A functionality response characteristics and functionality. MOTOROLA Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 3 C. 16 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 3 ❖ STATEMENT OF WORK WBS # WBS Title Action Deliverable Accountable Approval 2.5 Baseline Existing Motorola will test existing Weld Baseline Existing Hardware Motorola N/A Hardware Performance County equipment that will interface Performance with the SmartZone. 2.6 Site Walk Reports Motorola shall prepare a report that Site Walk Reports Motorola Weld County includes recommendations any site preparation required to provide a suitable environment for installation of this SmartZone equipment. This report will become part of the final system documentation. 2.7 Site Preparation Weld County will prepare the sites Sites ready for SmartZone Weld County Motorola for this SmartZone for implementation implementation based on the recommendations in the Site Walk Reports. 3 Order, Manufacture, During this phase of the SmartZone Ordered, manufactured, and Weld County& As defined and Ship Equipment implementation, all equipment is shipped equipment Motorola below ordered, manufactured, shipped, and inventoried. 3.1 Order and Manufacture Motorola will place factory orders for Order SmartZone hardware Motorola N/A Hardware the system hardware that is being purchased for this SmartZone. 3.2 Factory Staging Motorola will configure and Factory staged and tested Motorola As defined functionally test the IR sites at the SmartZone equipment below vendor's factory staging facility. 3.3 Documentation to Motorola will provide Factory with: Documentation required for Motorola N/A Factory staging delivered to the factory. Equipment configurations Site/System drawings (,3MOronOLA Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 3 C. 17 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 3 •• STATEMENT OF WORK WBS # WBS Title Action Deliverable Accountable Approval 4 Integration & Motorola will configure the Factory Integration and Motorola N/A Optimization at Factory SmartZone as intended for final Optimization installations as defined in the Design Document. Motorola will optimize system parameters and settings for the field implementation. 4.1 Factory Enhanced Install and test site monitoring Enhanced Support Tasks Motorola N/A System Support Tasks equipment. Completed 4.2 Factory Documentation Motorola will provide the Weld Factory Documentation Motorola Weld County County with the Factory documentation. 4.3 Ship Equipment Motorola will ship the hardware to a Shipped Equipment Motorola N/A designated Weld County location. 4.4 Shipment of Fixed Motorola will ship the SmartZone Shipment of factory staged Motorola Weld County Network Equipment equipment following acceptance of equipment the Factory Test 4.5 Shipment of non- Motorola will ship the equipment that Shipment on non-staged Motorola N/A Factory Staged will not be factory staged to the Weld equipment Equipment County's designated location. 5 Materials Management The Weld County and Motorola will Materials Management Weld County& As defined manage the receiving and tracking of Motorola below all project materials as defined below. 5.1 Warehouse Location The Weld County will designate and Warehouse Location Weld County N/A provide a central location to ship all project equipment. 5.1.1 Warehouse Security The Weld County will provide all Warehouse Security Weld County N/A security for the warehouse. 5.1.2 Materials Management Motorola will provide database Materials Management Motorola Weld County Database i software to track the receipt of ail ' Database ' ' project equipment. !MOTOROLA Attachment B--3/i3/2000 Section 3 C 18 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 3 ❖ STATEMENT OF WORK WBS # WBS Title Action Deliverable Accountable Approval 5.1.3 SmartZone Materials Motorola will execute the steps SmartZone Materials Motorola Weld County Management outlined below to manage the project Management equipment from receipt of shipment through implementations. 5.1.4 Receive, Verify, Log, Motorola will receive the project Receive, Verify, Log, and Store Motorola Weld County and Store Equipment equipment, verify receipt of the Equipment equipment as ordered, visually verify the equipment arrived undamaged, log the equipment in to the materials management database, and store the equipment in a designated location. 5.1.5 Inventory Motorola will maintain Inventory Documentation Motorola Weld County Documentation documentation verifying equipment shipments, serial numbers, and Weld County asset numbers. 5.1.6 Release Equipment for Motorola will track the release of Release Equipment for Motorola Weld County Implementation project equipment for Implementation implementation. 6 Site Installation During this phase of the project, all Installed SmartZone equipment Weld County& As defined SmartZone components are Motorola below physically installed 6.1 Execute subcontracts Motorola will execute the necessary Subcontracts in place Motorola N/A subcontracts for implementation of this SmartZone. ((waoronos_A Attachment B--3/1312000 Section 3 ❖ 19 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 3 ❖ STATEMENT OF WORK WBS # WBS Title Action Deliverable Accountable Approval 6.2 Site Ready Motorola will begin work at a site, Site Ready for installation Weld County Motorola only after mutual agreement by the Weld County and Motorola, that site is deemed ready, and released by the Weld County, according to the project schedule.At a minimum, Site Ready shall consist of adequate room in an existing building or shelter to accommodate the equipment to be installed, electrical service and internal distribution in place, and transport circuit testing has been satisfactorily completed as defined in the Statement of Work. 6.3 Site Access Motorola will coordinate site access Site Access Weld County Motorola on a mutually approved schedule with the Weld County. 6.4 Functional Existing or The Weld County will assure the Functional Existing Equipment Weld County Motorola Weld County Provided Weld County provided equipment Equipment functions as specified in the system design, through baselining the equipment's performance to design parameters. 6.5 Installation SmartZone Motorola will install the equipment Installed SmartZone Equipment Motorola Weld County IR site Equipment for this SmartZone. 7 Installation of Motorola will install the RF Installation of IR Site Motorola Weld County IntelliRepeater(IR) Cell equipment for[35TH AVE.] Equipment—[35TH AVE.] Site Equipment—[35TH IntelliRepeater Site of this AVE.] Site SmartZone, as described below. 7.1 Delivery of Equipment Motorola will deliver the equipment Equipment Delivered Motorola Weld County to Final Locations from the Weld County intermediate location to the final the Weld County locations, as required by the contract. (*I MOTOROLA Attachment B--3/1312000 Section 3 •) 20 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 3 • STATEMENT OF WORK WBS # WBS Title Action Deliverable Accountable Approval 7.2 Installation of Motorola will install the QUANTAR Installation of QUANTAR Motorola Weld County QUANTAR IntelliRepeaters IntelliRepeaters IntelliRepeaters 7.3 Installation of Ethernet Motorola will install the Ethernet Installation of Ethernet Cabling Motorola Weld County Cabling Cabling 7.4 Installation of Channel Motorola will install the Channel Installation of Channel Bank(s) Motorola Weld County Bank(s) Bank(s)and associated cards, as defined in the System Description. 7.5 Installation of MOSCAD Motorola will install the MOSCAD Installation of MOSCAD RTU Motorola Weld County RTU [AS REQUIRED] Remote Terminal Unit (RTU) 7.6 Installation of Back Up Motorola will install the back up Installation of Back Up Power Motorola Weld County Power [UPS] power, as defined in the System Description. 7.7 Installation of Antenna Motorola will install the antenna Installation of Antenna System Motorola Weld County System Equipment— system equipment for [35TH AVE.] Equipment—[35TH AVE.] Site [35TH AVE.] Site Site of this SmartZone, as described below. 7.8 Delivery of Equipment Motorola will deliver the equipment Equipment Delivered Motorola Weld County to Final Locations from the Weld County intermediate location to the final the Weld County locations, as required by the contract. 7.9 Installation of Motorola will install the transmitter Installation of Transmitter Motorola Weld County Transmitter combiner [AS REQUIRED] Combiner Combiner(s) 7.10 Installation of Receiver Motorola will install the receiver Installation of Receiver Motorola Weld County Multicoupler multicoupler and Tower Top Multicoupler Amplifier [AS REQUIRED] (M)MOTOROLA Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 3 •:• 21 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 3 ❖ STATEMENT OF WORK WBS # WBS Title Action Deliverable Accountable Approval 7.11 Installation of Jumpers Motorola will install the heliax and Installation of Jumpers and Motorola Weld County and Cables superfex cabling and surge Cables suppressors for all required antennas 7.12 Installation of Antennas Motorola will install all antennas and Installation of Antennas and Motorola Weld County and Antenna Mounts antenna mounts, as required in the Antenna Mounts system design. 7.13 Provide Site Links Weld County will provide the site Provide Site Links Weld County Motorola links: Digital Links for Simulcast Sites to Prime Site and Master Site Links for IR Cells to Master Site 8 Installation of Motorola will install the RF Installation of IR Site Motorola Weld County IntelliRepeater(IR) Cell equipment for [Greeley West] Equipment—[Greeley West] Equipment—[Greeley IntelliRepeater Site of this Site West] Site SmartZone, as described below. 8.1 Delivery of Equipment Motorola will deliver the equipment Equipment Delivered Motorola Weld County to Final Locations from the Weld County intermediate location to the final the Weld County locations, as required by the contract. 8.2 Installation of Motorola will install the QUANTAR Installation of QUANTAR Motorola Weld County QUANTAR IntelliRepeaters IntelliRepeaters IntelliRepeaters 8.3 Installation of Ethernet Motorola will install the Ethernet Installation of Ethernet Cabling Motorola Weld County Cabling Cabling 8.4 Installation of Channel Motorola will install the Channel Installation of Channel Bank(s) Motorola Weld County Bank(s) Bank(s)and associated cards, as defined in the System Description. ,yM1MOTOROLA Attachment B--3/13!2000 Section 3 C 22 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 3 •O STATEMENT OF WORK WBS # WBS Title Action Deliverable Accountable Approval 8.5 Installation of MOSCAD Motorola will install the MOSCAD Installation of MOSCAD RTU Motorola Weld County RTU [AS REQUIRED] Remote Terminal Unit(RTU) 8.6 Installation of Back Up Motorola will install the back up Installation of Back Up Power Motorola Weld County Power [DC ] power, as defined in the System Description. 8.7 Installation of Antenna Motorola will install the antenna Installation of Antenna System Motorola Weld County System Equipment— system equipment for[Greeley Equipment—[Greeley West] [Greeley West] Site West] Site of this SmartZone, as Site described below. 8.8 Delivery of Equipment Motorola will deliver the equipment Equipment Delivered Motorola Weld County to Final Locations from the Weld County intermediate location to the final the Weld County locations, as required by the contract. 8.9 Installation of Motorola will install the transmitter Installation of Transmitter Motorola Weld County Transmitter combiner [AS REQUIRED] Combiner Combiner(s) 8.10 Installation of Receiver Motorola will install the receiver Installation of Receiver Motorola Weld County Multicoupler multicoupler and Tower Top Multicoupler Amplifier[AS REQUIRED] 8.11 Installation of Jumpers Motorola will install the heliax and Installation of Jumpers and Motorola Weld County and Cables superflex cabling and surge Cables suppressors for all required antennas 8.12 Installation of Antennas Motorola will install all antennas and Installation of Antennas and Motorola Weld County and Antenna Mounts antenna mounts, as required in the Antenna Mounts system design. (9MoronoLA Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 3 ❖ 23 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 3 ❖ STATEMENT OF WORK WBS # WBS Title Action Deliverable Accountable Approval 8.13 Provide Site Links Weld County will provide the site Provide Site Links Weld County Motorola links: Digital Links for Simulcast Sites to Prime Site and Master Site Links for IR Cells to Master Site 8.14 Interface Existing The Weld County will connect the Cross Connect Equipment from Weld County N/A System to Demarcation Weld County provided equipment to Demarcation Points Points the new equipment via the demarcation blocks 8.15 Verification of proper Motorola will verify that the Verification of Proper Motorola Weld County installation SmartZone equipment installation Installation meets the requirements for proper operation. . Motorola will generate the Audit reports to be included as a part of the System Manual delivered after System Acceptance 9 Expansion of CEB w/ Motorola will install the new CEB Installation of CEB Equipment Motorola Weld County new BIM boards— equipment for[Dispatch] as — [Dispatch] Site [Dispatch] Site described below. 9.1 Delivery of Equipment Motorola will deliver the equipment Equipment Delivered Motorola Weld County to Final Locations from the Weld County intermediate location to the final the Weld County locations, as required by the contract. 9.2 Installation of CEB Motorola will install new CEB boards Installation of(7) new CEB Motorola Weld County equipment boards 9.3 Installation of Channel Motorola will install the Channel Installation of Channel Bank(s) Motorola Weld County Bank(s) Bank(s)and associated cards, as i defined in the System Description i t 7f3 MorowoLa Attachment B--3/1312000 Section 3 24 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 3 4• STATEMENT OF WORK WBS # WBS Title Action Deliverable Accountable Approval 9.4 Installation of Control Motorola will install the Control Installation of(6) Control Motorola Weld County Stations Stations Stations 9.5 Installation of Antenna Motorola will install the antenna Installation of Antenna System Motorola Weld County System Equipment— system equipment for [Dispatch] Site Equipment—[Dispatch] Site [Dispatch] Site of this SmartZone, as described below. 9.6 Delivery of Equipment Motorola will deliver the equipment Equipment Delivered Motorola Weld County to Final Locations from the Weld County intermediate location to the final the Weld County locations, as required by the contract. 9.7 Installation of Jumpers Motorola will install the heliax and Installation of Jumpers and Motorola Weld County and Cables superflex cabling and surge Cables suppressors for all required antennas 9.8 Installation of Antennas Motorola will install all antennas and Installation of Antennas and Motorola Weld County and Antenna Mounts antenna mounts, as required in the Antenna Mounts system design. 9.9 Provide Site Links Weld County will provide the site Provide Site Links Weld County Motorola links: Digital Links for Simulcast Sites to Prime Site and Master Site Links for IR Cells to Master Site 9.10 Interface Existing The Weld County will connect the Cross Connect Equipment from Weld County N/A System to Demarcation Weld County provided equipment to Demarcation Points Points the new equipment via the demarcation blocks c)MOTOROLA Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 3 4. 25 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 3 ❖ STATEMENT OF WORK WBS # WBS Title Action Deliverable Accountable Approval 10 Verification of proper Motorola will verify that the Verification of Proper Motorola Weld County installation SmartZone equipment installation Installation meets the requirements for proper operation. . Motorola will generate the Audit reports to be included as a part of the System Manual delivered after System Acceptance 10.1 System Optimization During this phase of the project, all Optimization of subsystem Weld County& As defined subsystem components are equipment Motorola below optimized. 10.1.1 Optimization of MOTOROLA will configure, optimize, Optimized SmartZone Motorola Weld County SmartZone Equipment and program all Weld County [35th Ave.] SmartZone equipment. MOTOROLA will prepare the equipment and SmartZones for final ATP testing. 10.1.2 Verify/Test SmartZone MOTOROLA will prepare the Verify/Test SmartZone Motorola Weld County Functionality SmartZone for acceptance testing by Functionality thoroughly testing the SmartZone functionality. 10.1.3 Provide SmartZone MOTOROLA will provide SmartZone SmartZone Interface Motorola Weld County Interface Integration interfaces to other SmartZone and Integration Services Services existing equipment as required in the Detailed Design Review. 10.1.4 Physical Connection MOTOROLA will physically connect Physical Connection Motorola Weld County SmartZone with the physical medium defined in the DDR. 10.2 Logical Connection MOTOROLA will configure Logical Connection Motorola Weld County SmartZone port(s) as defined in the DDR to interface with the SmartZone. (43 MOTOROLA Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 3 C. 26 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 3 ❖ STATEMENT OF WORK WBS # WBS Title Action Deliverable Accountable Approval 10.2.1 Optimization of MOTOROLA will configure, optimize, Optimized SmartZone Motorola Weld County SmartZone Equipment and program all Weld County [Greeley West] SmartZone equipment. MOTOROLA will prepare the equipment and SmartZones for final ATP testing. 10.2.2 Verify/Test SmartZone MOTOROLA will prepare the Verify/Test SmartZone Motorola Weld County Functionality SmartZone for acceptance testing by Functionality thoroughly testing the SmartZone functionality. 10.2.3 Provide SmartZone MOTOROLA will provide SmartZone SmartZone Interface Motorola Weld County Interface Integration interfaces to other SmartZone and Integration Services Services existing equipment as required in the Detailed Design Review. 10.2.3 Physical Connection MOTOROLA will physically connect Physical Connection Motorola Weld County SmartZone with the physical medium defined in the DDR. 10.2.4 Logical Connection MOTOROLA will configure Logical Connection Motorola Weld County SmartZone port(s)as defined in the DDR to interface with the SmartZone. 10.3 Optimization of MOTOROLA will configure, optimize, Optimized SmartZone Motorola Weld County SmartZone Equipment and program all Weld County [Dispatch.] SmartZone equipment. MOTOROLA will prepare the equipment and SmartZones for final ATP testing. 10.3.1 Verify!Test SmartZone MOTOROLA will prepare the Verify/Test SmartZone Motorola Weld County Functionality SmartZone for acceptance testing by Functionality thoroughly testing the SmartZone functionality. *MOTOROLA Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 3 •:• 27 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 3 •: STATEMENT OF WORK WBS# WBS Title Action Deliverable Accountable Approval 10.3.2 Provide SmartZone MOTOROLA will provide SmartZone SmartZone Interface Motorola Weld County Interface Integration interfaces to other SmartZone and Integration Services Services existing equipment as required in the Detailed Design Review. 10.3.3 Physical Connection MOTOROLA will physically connect Physical Connection Motorola Weld County SmartZone with the physical medium defined in the DDR. 10.3.4 Logical Connection MOTOROLA will configure Logical Connection Motorola Weld County SmartZone port(s)as defined in the DDR to interface with the SmartZone. 11 Subscribers This project phase consists of Subscriber Fleetmap and Weld County& As defined defining subscriber programming. programming templates. Motorola below 11.1 End User Programming Motorola will provide the Weld End User Programming Motorola Weld County Template Requirements County with technical input to assist Requirements Technical Input Technical Input in defining the WELD County's end user programming requirements. 11.2 End User Programming The Weld County will define the End User Programming Weld County Motorola Template Requirements programming configurations of the Requirements end user equipment 11.3 End User Programming Motorola will provide the End User Programming Motorola Weld County Templates programming templates for the Templates subscriber equipment to the Weld County. A maximum of ten programming templates will be made for end user equipment. Changes made by the Weld County after the first templates are approved will be accommodated through the change order process. 11.4 Programming End User Weld County will oroaram the WELD Programming End User Weld County Motorola Equipment County's subscriber equipment. Equipment (M)MoronoLA Attachment B--313/2000 Section 3 + 28 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 3 •S STATEMENT OF WORK WBS # WBS Title Action Deliverable Accountable Approval 11.5 Installation of End User Weld county will install end user Installation of End User Weld County Motorola Equipment equipment as defined in the Cutover Equipment Plan. 12 Acceptance Test Plan During this phase of the project, all Execution of subsystem Weld County& As defined subsystem components are tested equipment ATP Motorola below and documented as defined in the Acceptance Test Plan. 12.1 Standalone Acceptance Motorola will perform the Standalone Acceptance Motorola Weld County Testing Acceptance Test as defined in the Testing DDR to test the SmartZone subsystem to test the standalone functionality of the subsystem. 12.2 Functional Tests Motorola will perform functional Execution of functional ATPs Motorola Weld County ATPs as defined in the DDR for this subsystem. During each test, test results will be recorded for review and approval of the test. Upon successful completion of each Acceptance test on a site by site and system by system level, the Weld County and Motorola will sign acceptance certificates documenting acceptance. 12.3 Coverage Acceptance Motorola will execute the coverage Execution of the CATP Motorola Weld County Testing acceptance testing in accordance with the Acceptance Test Plan. 12.4 Define punchlist Weld County and Motorola will Punchlist defined Weld County& Weld County mutually agree with the equipment Motorola & Motorola vendor and implementation provider on punchlist items to be resolved prior to Final System Acceptance. (M)MOTOROLA Attachment B--3!13/2000 Section 3 :• 29 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 3 :• STATEMENT OF WORK WBS # WBS Title Action Deliverable Accountable Approval 12.5 System Acceptance Upon successful execution of the System Acceptance Weld County Motorola Acceptance Test Plan, the Weld Acknowledgment County will acknowledge System Acceptance by signing the System Acceptance Certificate. Acceptance will occur on a site by site and system by system basis 13 Decommission Old Where an existing system is being Decommission Old System Weld County Motorola System taken out of service, Weld County will reconfigure new equipment as necessary to delete access to the old equipment. 13.1 Old System Equipment Weld County will remove equipment Old System Equipment Weld County TBD Removal being taken out of service and locate Removal the equipment in a designated Weld County location. 14 Post Acceptance Post Acceptance user requirements Post Acceptance Support Weld County& As defined Support for the SmartZone are supported as Motorola below described below. 14.1 System Support/ At this phase, the SmartZone System Support/System Motorola N/A System Documentation transitions to post acceptance Documentation support 14.2 Review Acceptance Motorola will formally review the Review Acceptance Status Motorola N/A Status status of System Acceptance and System Warranty with the Weld County and the designated service provider 14.3 Warranty Set Up Motorola will provide the Weld Warranty Set Up Motorola N/A County with all the necessary information to obtain warranty services and equipment during the warranty period. I I I (M)maronOa Attachment B--3/13!2UOU Section 3 •O 30 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 3 ❖ STATEMENT OF WORK WBS # WBS Title Action Deliverable Accountable Approval 14.3.1 Extended Maintenance Motorola will provide the Weld Extended Maintenance Motorola N/A County with all the necessary Information information to obtain extended maintenance services during the extended maintenance period. 15 Deliver System Manual Motorola will provide final system Delivery of System Manuals Motorola Weld County documentation to the Weld County and to the designated service provider. 15.1 Final SmartZone The Final Acceptance phase of each Final SmartZone Acceptance Weld County& As defined Acceptance SmartZone consists of ensuring that Motorola below all criteria for Final Acceptance have been met. 15.2 Ensure System Motorola will ensure that the criteria Review ATP Criteria Motorola Weld County Acceptance Criteria for Final Acceptance have been met. Completed 15.3 Successful Execution of The ATP must have been Successful Execution of ATP Motorola Weld County ATP successfully executed and documented per the ATP. The Weld County will acknowledge System Acceptance upon passing the ATP. 15.4 Documentation and Motorola will resolve punchlist Documentation and Resolution Motorola Weld County Resolution of Punchlist documented at System Acceptance of Punchlist Items Items 15.5 Delivery of Final System Motorola will provide System Delivery of System Manual Motorola Weld County Documentation Manuals with documentation as defined in the SOW. 15.6 Project Transition to Motorola will ensure that the criteria Project Transitioned to Service Motorola Weld County Service Completed defined to transition the project to service has been completed. MOTOROLA Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 3 C. 31 Confidential and Proprietary SECTION 3 ❖ STATEMENT OF WORK WBS# WBS Title Action Deliverable Accountable Approval 15.7 Training Motorola will ensure that the training Training Delivered Motorola Weld County to be delivered by Motorola, as defined in the Training Plan, has been delivered. 15.8 Final System The Weld County will acknowledge Final Acceptance of SmartZone Weld County Motorola Acceptance Final System Acceptance upon completion of the criteria for Final System Acceptance for this SmartZone. nMOTOROs-A Attachment B--3/13/2000 Section 3 ❖ 32 Confidential and Proprietary Hello